e-manual

431
IMPORTANT READ THIS BEFORE USING YOUR NEW MICROLOG The Microlog must be manually initialized when you first receive it. To verify that your Microlog has been initialized properly, here is a technique we suggest you use. Before initializing, go to the Microlog’s Utilities/System Setup screen and set Auto Range:On. Initialize as described below, then go back to the Utilities/System Setup screen. If you see Auto Range: set to Off, you have successfully initialized. Warning - Initialization resets all Microlog settings to their factory defaults, deletes all downloaded ROUTE infor- mation, and deletes any measurements stored in the Microlog. To initialize the Microlog: With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold down the Microlog’s 9 and 6 keys. While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, press and release the ON/OFF key, continue holding down the 9 and 6 keys until the Microlog’s first screen fully displays. The Microlog’s status line at the top of the main menu display should indicate 100% of free memory.

Upload: alx-radu

Post on 23-Nov-2014

75 views

Category:

Documents


15 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: E-MANUAL

IMPORTANT

READ THIS BEFORE USING YOUR NEW MICROLOG

The Microlog must be manually initialized when you first receive it.

¾ To verify that your Microlog has been initialized properly,here is a technique we suggest you use.

Before initializing, go to the Microlog’s Utilities/System Setupscreen and set Auto Range:On. Initialize as described below,then go back to the Utilities/System Setup screen. If you seeAuto Range: set to Off , you have successfully initialized.

¾ Warning - Initialization resets all Microlog settings totheir factory defaults, deletes all downloaded ROUTE infor-mation, and deletes any measurements stored in the Microlog.

To initialize the Microlog:

With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold down the Microlog’s9 and 6 keys.

While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, press and release the ON/OFFkey, continue holding down the 9 and 6 keys until the Microlog’sfirst screen fully displays.

The Microlog’s status line at the top of the main menu displayshould indicate 100% of free memory.

Page 2: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Page 3: E-MANUAL

MicrologData Collector/Analyzer

CMVA60 & CMVA60 ULS

Supports MICROLOG Firmware Version 3.81Supports PRISM2 Version 1.31

Supports PRISM4 for Windows Version 1.32User Manual: Part No. 31814500

Revision A

User Manual

Copyright 1986-1999 by SKF Condition Monitoring Inc. All Rights Reserved.4141 Ruffin Road San Diego, CA 92123-1841 USATelephone: (858) 496-3400, FAX (858) 496-3531Customer Service: 1-800-523-7514

Page 4: E-MANUAL

121099 sbg

SKF Condition Monitoring Area Centers

North and South America4141 Ruffin RoadSan Diego, California 92123 USATelephone (858) 496-3400FAX (858) 496-3531

Europe, Africa, Middle EastPostbox 20915300 CB ZaltbommelThe NetherlandsTelephone (+ 31-418)-681818FAX (+ 31-418)-681800

Asia, PacificKawasan Perindustrian NilaiP.O. Box 2671807 NilaiNegeri Sembilan Darul KhususMalaysiaTelephone (+ 60-6)-799-2713FAX (+ 60-6)-799-2407

Page 5: E-MANUAL

SKF Condition MonitoringService Policy, Warranty, Disclaimer, and Limita-tion of Remedies

EXCEPT FOR THE LIM-ITED WARRANTY DE-SCRIBED BELOW, THEREARE NO WARRANTIES,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE IM-PLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY ANDFITNESS FOR A PARTICU-LAR PURPOSE; ALLSUCH WARRANTIES AREEXPRESSLY AND SPE-CIFICALLY DISCLAIMED.

MICROLOG is guaranteedfree of defects in material andworkmanship.

Electronic components,transducers, accelerometers,and the keypad are guaranteedfor a period of twelve (12)months, mechanical compo-nents and cable assembliesare guaranteed for a period ofninety (90) days.

This warranty does not extendto units that have been mis-used, altered, or repairedwithout manufacturer ’sauthorization. Defects orfailures experienced duringthe warranty period will becorrected at no charge at themanufacturer’s facility. If,upon examination, it is found

that the defect is not withinthe scope of this warranty, anestimate of repair charges anda request for authorization toproceed with repair will besubmitted, along with a state-ment of the reasons the re-pairs are not considered to becovered by the warranty.

This warranty does not extendto system components such astransducers, drivers, and ca-ble assemblies manufacturedby others. Warranty for thesecomponents will be theirmanufacturer’s standard.

Manufacturer’s liability underthis warranty is limited to re-pair or replacement of any de-fective instrument at thediscretion of the manufac-turer.

In the event that any of theabove limitations are held un-enforceable, our liability toyou shall not exceed the li-cense fee you paid, regardlessof the form of any claim. Be-cause of the extreme diversityof ways that the product canbe used, you are advised totest the product thoroughlyfor your purposes before rely-ing on it.

Page 6: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Page 7: E-MANUAL

Table of Contents

Introduction I

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1Who Uses the Microlog/PRISM System? . . . . I-3What is the CMVA60 Microlog System? . . . . I-3Microlog System Connections . . . . . . . . . . I-8What You Will Find On The Main Screen . . . I-9The Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15The Backlighting Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-19BNC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-20How to Initialize Your Microlog . . . . . . . . . I-22

Standard Microlog Measurement Setups App

How to Use this “Applications” Section . . App-2What Is Typical Machinery? . . . . . . . . . App-3What Are Standard Measurements? . . . . App-4Velocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations . . . . . . . . App-6Standard Velocity Measurement . . . . . . . App-9Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-10Setting the Microlog’s Utilities Options . App-10Standard Velocity Measurement Setup . . App-12Standard Acceleration Measurement . . . App-15Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-16Standard Acceleration Measurement Setup App-16Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement . . . . . . . App-19Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-20Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup . . . . App-20Standard Displacement Measurement . . App-23Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-24

CMVA60 Microlog TOC - 1User Manual change 01

Page 8: E-MANUAL

Standard Displacement Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . App-25

The Route Menu 1

The ROUTE Feature of the PRISM Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Collecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2The Route List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Static Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Measurement Options Menu (Static) . . . . . 1-8Dynamic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Measurement Options Menu (Dynamic) . . . 1-21Using a Temporarily Attached Pickup . . . . . 1-21Hints for Efficient Data Collection . . . . . . . 1-22To Make An On-the-Spot Analysis . . . . . . . 1-24Spectral Banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Downloading FAM Information . . . . . . . . 1-28Multi-Point Automation (MPA) . . . . . . . . 1-32MPA ROUTE Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32MPA Group Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

The NonRoute Menu 2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Types of Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Dynamic Measurements (Overview) . . . . . . 2-4Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Spectrum Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq . . . 2-14Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders . . 2-20Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Display Setup/Trace: Single . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Display Setup/Trace: Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only) . . . 2-26Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only) . . . 2-29Collecting NonRoute Dynamic Data . . . . . . 2-32Using the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

TOC - 2 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 9: E-MANUAL

Process Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Collecting NonRoute Process Data . . . . . . 2-43HFD Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Collecting NonRoute HFD Data . . . . . . . 2-46Running Speed Measurements . . . . . . . . 2-47Collecting NonRoute Running Speed Data . . 2-49

The Transfer Menu 3

Setting the Communication Mode Parameters . 3-1Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Data Transfer - Download . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Data Transfer - Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

The Applications Menu 4

Balancing (Basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Basic Balancing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Balancing (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options . . . . 4-20Reference Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Trial Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Trim Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43The Review/Enter Data Screens . . . . . . . . 4-47Save Balance Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53The Utility Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Combining Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Splitting One Weight Into Two . . . . . . . . . 4-57Balance Job Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59Clearing the Current Job From Temporary Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . 4-61Reset Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Delete Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Advanced Balancing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Tracking Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Cyclic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69Current Analysis Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Current Analysis Data Collection . . . . . . . 4-86

CMVA60 Microlog TOC - 3User Manual change 01

Page 10: E-MANUAL

Bump Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91Run Up/Coast Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Configuration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

The Analyzer Menu 5

The Analyzer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Collecting Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Using the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Phase Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

The Review Menu 6

The Review Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

The Reports Menu 7

The Reports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2The Report Controls Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3F1 - Route List/F2 - Print . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Sample Report Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

The Utilities Menu 8

Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Temp/Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Set Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Route Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Flash Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

TOC - 4 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 11: E-MANUAL

Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing A

Changing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2Unintentional Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5Aborting Deep Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5Thermal Switch - NiMH Battery Pack . . . . . A-6

Specifications B

Specifications for CMVA60 . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Why Zoom? C

Why Zoom? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Multi-pin Input Pinouts D

Pinout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Remote Communications E

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1Preference Settings (PRISM4 Remote) . . . . . E-1Placing PRISM4 Remote in "Waiting" Mode . . E-9Preference Settings (Microlog) . . . . . . . . E-10Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module) . . . . . E-12Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16Load Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18Change DBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20Clear Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22Reset DBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25Supported Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25Troubleshooting Modem Communications . . E-26

CMVA60 Microlog TOC - 5User Manual change 01

Page 12: E-MANUAL

Microlog Download Utility F

Installing Microlog Download Utility . . . . . F-1Connecting your Microlog . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2Microlog Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2Downloading Code/Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

Triax Sensor Interface G

How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor . . . . . . . . . . G-1Triaxial MPA ROUTE Setup . . . . . . . . . . G-8Connecting the Triaxial Sensor to the Microlog . . . . . . . G-10Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection . . . . G-11

Glossary

Index

TOC - 6 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 13: E-MANUAL

2-27-92 3:25 S.G.

02/19/92

Introduction

About This Manual

This manual introduces you to the CMVA60 Microlog sys-tem. It offers a complete and detailed reference to eachMicrolog menu, data screen, and data screen option. Thisinformation is essential when setting up the CMVA60 Microlog and when using the Microlog to collect and dis-play machinery data.

¾ The CMVA60 ULS is the Ultra LowSpeed version of the standard CMVA60.Its performance is optimized for ultra lowspeed machine applications. All otherfunctionality for the CMVA60 ULS re-mains identical to the CMVA60 V3.81.

As you use this manual, you’ll discover certain conven-tions used:

Bold type is used to indicate text that appears in a Microlog menu or data screen.Italics are used to emphasize important information.

¾ are used to indicate notes to the reader.

Step-by-step procedures are sequenced using

bullets, •.

¾ The CMVA60 Microlog may be config-ured for either English or Metric units ofmeasurement. In this manual, all Microlog setup and display screens ap-pear with English units.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 1User Manual

Page 14: E-MANUAL

Chapter OverviewThis manual’s chapters are organized to help the new Microlog user quickly set up the Microlog for measuringspecific applications, and to quickly reference the Microlog’s menus, data screens, and options. A chapteroverview follows:

Introduction - Describes this User Manual, overviews theMicrolog system, and describes new enhancements to theMicrolog data collector.

Applications - This section uses flow charts and text tohelp new users quickly set up the Microlog to perform“standard” vibration measurements on “ typical” rotatingmachinery.

Reference Manual - Chapters 1 - 8

Chapters 1 through 8 offer a complete and detailed descrip-tion of each Microlog menu, its data screens and options:

Chapter 1, The Route MenuChapter 2, The NonRoute Menu Chapter 3, The Transfer MenuChapter 4, The Applications MenuChapter 5, The Analyzer MenuChapter 6, The Review MenuChapter 7, The Reports MenuChapter 8, The Utilities Menu

Appendices A - F

Appendices A through F provide valuable information onthe Microlog and its applications:

Appendix A, Battery Capacity, Care, and TestingAppendix B, SpecificationsAppendix C, Why Zoom?Appendix D, Multi-pin Input PinoutsAppendix E, Remote Communications

IntroductionAbout This Manual

Intro - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 15: E-MANUAL

Appendix F - Microlog Download UtilityAppendix G - Introduction to the Triax Acceler-ometer Sensor

Who Uses the Microlog/PRISM System?

The CMVA60 Microlog/PRISM System is used by experi-enced machinery maintenance personnel who wish to col-lect and analyze vibration data from their rotatingmachinery, to help reduce costs and downtime.

What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

A CMVA60 Microlog System (Figure I - 1) consists ofthree components:

• A CMVA60 Microlog data collector, • A host computer with PRISM2, PRISM4 for

Windows, or equivalent software, and

• A support module.

da

IntroductionWho Uses the Microlog/PRISM System?

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 3User Manual

Page 16: E-MANUAL

The CMVA60 Microlog Data CollectorThe CMVA60 Microlog data collector is a lightweight,portable, data acquisition and storage terminal (Figure I - 2). It collects machinery vibration, temperature, andother condition monitoring measurements. Together withvisual observations, the CMVA60 Microlog allows for de-tailed machine condition analyses in a harsh industrial en-vironment.

host computer

supportmodule

Micrologdata collector

CMSS50080 orCMSS50080-CE andCMSS250 25 PIN to 9 PIN

CMSS50077

Figure I - 1. The Microlog System.

IntroductionWhat is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

Intro - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 17: E-MANUAL

CMVA55-1.w mf

The Microlog performs all the tasks required for machin-ery predictive (condition) maintenance. It automaticallycollects both dynamic (vibration) and static (process) meas-urements from almost any source, it provides easy to useset up screens for quickly capturing data related to specificapplications like balancing, tracking filter, cyclic analysis,and current analysis, and it allows the user to configure upto 12 measurements for automatic data collection at onemeasurement point. Using the same sensor, the user needpress only one button to sequentially collect all pre-config-ured measurements.

Figure I - 2. Model CMVA60.

IntroductionWhat is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 5User Manual

Page 18: E-MANUAL

A variety of input devices may be used with your Microlog. Vibration measurements are collected with ahandheld probe, magnetically mounted probe, permanentlymounted sensors, or from an installed monitoring system.Temperature measurements are collected with a non-con-tact infrared sensor or with a contact probe.

Values read from other indicators may be entered into theMicrolog by pressing the appropriate numeric keys on theMicrolog keyboard. You can also enter your observationsby typing them in languages or as coded notes.

In addition to its function as a data collector, the Microloghas all the functions and performances of a powerful ana-lyzer to capture and display high resolution spectra for de-tailed analysis. A Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)frequency spectrum and a time domain waveform are avail-able for display on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)screen.

The Microlog automatically turns itself off after 5 minutesof inactivity to preserve battery life (in all functions exceptAnalyzer, Transfer, Battery/Temperature, and Re-ports).

PRISM Host SoftwarePRISM2 (DOS version) and PRISM4 for Windows are op-tional support software packages that work with the Microlog to help machinery maintenance personnel man-age machine condition data.

¾ In this manual, the term “PRISM hostsoftware” describes both PRISM versions(DOS and Windows).

PRISM host software automatically performs the tediousclerical work required in sorting and saving data.

IntroductionWhat is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

Intro - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 19: E-MANUAL

Through detailed printed reports it alerts maintenance per-sonnel to alarm conditions (exceptions from normal).

PRISM host software helps machinery maintenance person-nel to understand the true condition of their rotating ma-chinery and to base maintenance decisions on the actualcondition of machines.

PRISM host software excels in presenting collected ma-chinery data in statistical and graphic plot format to obtainuseful analysis data (Figure I - 3).

30.pcx

Refer to the PRISM host software’s User Manual for op-erational details.

¾ The host computer has varying minimumconfigurations depending on whichPRISM host software is used. See yourPRISM host software’s User Manual fordetailed minimum configuration informa-tion.

Figure I - 3. A PRISM4 Spectrum Display.

IntroductionWhat is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 7User Manual

Page 20: E-MANUAL

The Support ModuleThe CMVA6112 Support Module (Figure I - 4) is capableof fast charging the NiMH (CMVA50230-1) battery pack.

suppmod2.pcx

There are 2 LEDs and a Deep Discharge button on theCMVA6112 Support Module. The Deep Discharge buttonis used for deep discharging the battery pack in the sup-port module’s pocket. Once deep discharging is complete,the support module automatically fast charges the batterypack.

The “Battery in Charger” LED indicates the chargingstatus of the battery pack on the support module, the “Bat-tery in Microlog ” LED displays the charging status of thebattery pack in the Microlog.

The LEDs indicate the battery pack’s 3 different chargingmodes:

Deep Discharging (Support Module battery only) -LED flashes slowly.

Fast Charge - LED is ON continuously.

Figure I - 4.The CMVA6112 Support Module.

IntroductionWhat is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

Intro - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 21: E-MANUAL

Trickle Charge - LED flashes quickly.

¾ Reference Appendix A for a detailed de-scription of battery capacity, care, andtesting.

¾ The CMVA6112 is powered by an univer-sal AC/DC adapter. Use of a differentadapter to power the Support Moduleshould be consulted with the manufac-turer, or the Support Module may be dam-aged.

Microlog System Connections

The support module (Figure I - 4) supplied with each Mi-crolog system provides a convenient, compatible interfacebetween the Microlog and its host computer through RS-232 connectors. The support module also contains the bat-tery charger for the Microlog’s batteries.

IntroductionMicrolog System Connections

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 9User Manual

Page 22: E-MANUAL

> To connect your Microlog system:• Using the supplied CMSS50080, CMSS50080-

CE cable, or CMSS250 (25 PIN to 9 PIN adapt-er supporting 9 PIN serial ports), connect yourhost computer to the support module betweenthe connection marked COMPUTER on thesupport module and one of the serial ports(COM1 or COM2) on the back of your com-puter (Figure I - 1).

• Using the supplied CMSS50077 cable, connectthe support module to the Microlog between theconnector marked MICROLOG on the supportmodule and the 25-pin D connector on the topsurface of the Microlog Collector.

• Plug the support module into an AC power sup-ply through the external transformer adapter sup-plied with the support module.

¾ Before using your Microlog, check tomake sure that the transformer adaptersupplied with your support module is cor-rect for your electric line supply.The Microlog uses the same 25-pin Dconnector for connection to its varioussensors and to its support module.Keep the connector attached to insure itremains clean while in an industrial envi-ronment.

What You Will Find On The Main Screen

The Microlog collector has a large, supertwist graphic liq-uid crystal display (LCD). Everything needed to identifyand assess a measurement (identification, description, en-gineering units, warning alarms, last value recorded, andcurrent value) appears on the graphic LCD screen.

IntroductionWhat You Will Find On The Main Screen

Intro - 10 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 23: E-MANUAL

When you first turn on the Microlog collector, the mainmenu and title block are displayed (Figure I - 5).

03-2mlog.pcx

Version NumberThe title block, displayed to the right of the main menu onpower up, includes the firmware version number. Use thisnumber if you call customer support.

¾ If you call customer support, you willalso be asked for the Microlog’s serialnumber. It is located on back of the Mi-crolog case..

The Microlog screen contains three main areas: statusline, working area, and prompt area.

Figure I - 5.The CMVA60 Microlog Power Up Screen.

IntroductionWhat You Will Find On The Main Screen

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 11User Manual

Page 24: E-MANUAL

The Status LineThe one-line strip at the top of your Microlog screen iscalled the status line (Figure I - 6).

screen00.pcx

The status line displays the current date and time (if youpreviously set them correctly). The status line also con-stantly reports on the percent of free memory available.Other items of information appear from time to time in thestatus line. They are:

• Signal Overload Warning (OV)

• Low Battery Warning (BT)• Out of Limit Collector Temperature Warning

(TP)

• Shift Lock On up arrow indicator

When the BT (low battery charge) indicator appears, youhave approximately 20 minutes to complete immediatemeasurements before the Microlog shuts down to preserveyour data. At this point you can replace the main batteryor connect the Microlog to its support module charger.All data and instructions in the Microlog are fully pre-served for up to 3 minutes by an internal power sourcewhile you change the main battery.

The Signal Overload Warning (OV) displays to warn ofprobable inaccuracies when an incoming signal overloadsthe internal signal conditioning. Do not record data withthe OV indicator continuously on. Instead, range up bypressing the up arrow key until the OV warning disappears.

status line

Figure I - 6. The Status Line.

IntroductionWhat You Will Find On The Main Screen

Intro - 12 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 25: E-MANUAL

The Working AreaThe Microlog’s working area includes all screen lines ex-cept the top line (the status line), and the bottom line (theprompt line).

screen00.pcx

The working area displays various menus (Figures 1 - 7and 1 - 8), vibration spectra (Figure 1 - 9), and machinerycondition displays (Figure 1 - 10).

Figure I - 7. The Main Menu.

IntroductionWhat You Will Find On The Main Screen

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 13User Manual

Page 26: E-MANUAL

screen02.pcx

screen07.pcx

Figure I - 8. The Speed Input Selection Screen.

Figure I - 9. A Vibration Spectrum Display Screen.

IntroductionWhat You Will Find On The Main Screen

Intro - 14 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 27: E-MANUAL

battery.pcx

The Prompt AreaThe one-line strip at the bottom of your Microlog screen iscalled the prompt line. Its prompts (messages) are singleline clues to what is happening and to what choices youhave next (Figure 1 - 11).

screen01.pcx

Figure I - 10.The Battery and Operating Temperature Condition Screen.

prompt area

Figure I - 11. The Prompt Line.

IntroductionWhat You Will Find On The Main Screen

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 15User Manual

Page 28: E-MANUAL

The Keypad

For easy learning and use, the Microlog keys are dividedinto five groups: Operating Keys, Control Keys, NumericKeys, Function Keys, and Miscellaneous Keys (Figure I -12).

CMVA55-1.w mf

13 Function Keys

6 ControlKeys

12 NumericKeys

3 Miscellaneous Keys

4 Operating Keys

Figure I - 12.A Microlog Front Panel.

IntroductionThe Keypad

Intro - 16 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 29: E-MANUAL

Operating Keys The four Operating Keys are ENTER (2), DISPLAY IL-LUMINATION and ON/OFF (Figure I - 13).

CMVA55-1.w mf

Control Keys CMVA55-1.w mf

The six control keys are located below both ENTER keys(Figure I - 14).

Escape and Menu - The two leftmost keys are designatedESCAPE and MENU.

MENU displays a pop-up menu window.

ESCAPE returns the Microlog back one menu. TheMicrolog reports the action to be performed by the

Figure I - 13.The Operating Keys: ENTER (2), Display Illumination and ON/OFF.

Figure I - 14. The Control Keys.

IntroductionThe Keypad

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 17User Manual

Page 30: E-MANUAL

ENTER, MENU , and ESCAPE keys in the promptline at the bottom of your screen.

Arrow Keys - The four keys to the left of the ENTER keyare the arrow keys. The right arrow and left arrowkeys control the menu pointer bar, control the FFTspectrum cursor, are used in display expansion, andare used to open or close SETs from a ROUTE list.

The up arrow and down arrow keys also control themenu pointer bar. In addition, they control full scaleamplitude range, reposition markers, and are used totraverse the ROUTE list via SETs.

Numeric Keys The numeric keys (Figure I - 15) are located in the rightbottom section of the keypad.

CMVA55-1.w mf

Numeric keys may, under certain circumstances, assumeadditional functions which duplicate commands on the pop-up menu. PGUP, PGDN, HOME , END, (GLOBAL)OPEN, and (GLOBAL) CLOSE may all be implemented

Figure I - 15. The Numeric Keys.

IntroductionThe Keypad

Intro - 18 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 31: E-MANUAL

directly from the numeric keypad without displaying thepop-up menu. This feature is very useful and saves consid-erable time when moving through a hierarchy list.

Function Keys You may activate analyzer functions such as FREEZE,MKRS ON/OFF, DISPLY EXPAND , SAVE, andZOOM by pressing labeled keys located in the left centersection of the keypad (Figure I - 16).

CMVA55-1.w mf

Miscellaneous Keys

SHIFT - You make most entries through the keypad in un-shifted mode. This includes operating the arrowkeys, entering numerals, and activating analyzer func-tions. However, you must use shifted mode to enterletters (alphabetic characters). You change betweenshifted and unshifted modes by pressing the medium

Figure I - 16. The Function Keys.

IntroductionThe Keypad

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 19User Manual

Page 32: E-MANUAL

grey SHIFT key located at the bottom center of thekeypad (Figure I - 17).

CMVA55-1.w mf

SHIFT is a toggle action key. It works like theCAPS LOCK key on your computer keyboard.When the keypad is in shifted mode, an upward point-ing arrow in the status line just to the right of percent-age memory remaining serves as a reminder (Figure I- 18).

screen01.pcx

SPACE - Enters a space character (like the space bar onyour computer).

DEL - Deletes the current character at the cursor position(only valid when editing a field.)

The Backlighting Key

Press the “ light bulb,” or Display Illumination key to theleft of the ON/OFF key (Figure I - 19) to toggle screenbacklighting on and off. Use this feature to make viewingeasier in a dimly lighted area.

Figure I - 17. The Miscellaneous Keys.

caps lock indicator

Figure I - 18. The Caps Lock Indicator.

IntroductionThe Backlighting Key

Intro - 20 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 33: E-MANUAL

CMVA55-1.w mf

¾ Backlighting requires considerable powerand could reduce the time between batterycharges by as much as one-half (typicallyone-fourth).

BNC Connectors

Three BNC connectors (INPUT, PHASE, and OUTPUT)are provided on the CMVA60 Microlog. These connectorsprovide cabling flexibility to external sensors or externalmonitoring/recording equipment.

When using the two input BNC connectors (INPUT andPHASE) it is important to note that the multi-pin connec-tor’s “Cable Identification” has been disabled to achievethe flexibility of accepting signals from different sensors;including accelerometers, velocity and displacement sen-sors, process inputs, etc. Therefore, when the INPUTBNC connector is activated, the CMVA60 Microlog pro-ceeds to take data when the measurement is started, eventhough there is no sensor or cable attached.

¾ Power is supplied to BNC connectorsonly when Connector:BNC and SensorPower:ICP are selected in the Utilities/System Setup option.

Figure I - 19

IntroductionBNC Connectors

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 21User Manual

Page 34: E-MANUAL

These BNCs connectors are labeled:

INPUT - Accepts dynamic and process inputs using offthe shelf interfaces such as ultrasonic detectors. Itcan be selected in the Utilities/System Setup menuas either ICP, External, or Charge Amp.

ICP - Selected when a sensor which requires 24 Vdc/2.2 mA is attached to the INPUT.

¾ INPUT BNC must be set to the ICP op-tion to power any sensor connected to theINPUT BNC (which requires 24 Vdc/2.2 mA).

External - Select when taking measurements out of“Buffered” outputs like those on permanentlymounted rack systems, process signals, or from a sin-gal generator.

Charge Amp - Select when a “Charge Mode” Accel-erometer (pC/g) is attached.

PHASE - Accepts and conditions tachometer inputs suchas; Eddy Probes, laser tachometers, optical tachome-ters, etc.

OUTPUT - Provides a buffered replica of the input signalfor recording, headphones, or further external signalprocessing. It is important to note that depending onthe size of the signal and the gain selected, the outputmay be 1/10 the amplitude of the input.

IntroductionBNC Connectors

Intro - 22 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 35: E-MANUAL

How to Initialize Your Microlog

The Microlog must be manually initialized when you firstreceive it.

> To verify that your CMVA60 Microlog has been initial-ized properly:

• Access the Microlog’s Utilities/System Setupscreen and set Auto Range:On.

• Initialize as described below.• Go back to the Utilities/System Setup screen.

If you see Auto Range: set to OFF, you havesuccessfully initialized.

¾ Warning - Initialization resets all Microlog settings to their factory defaults,deletes all downloaded ROUTE informa-tion, and deletes any measurements storedin the Microlog.

> To initialize your Microlog:• With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold

down the Microlog’s 9 and 6 keys.• While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, press and re-

lease the ON/OFF key, continue holding downthe 9 and 6 keys until the Microlog’s first screenfully displays. 8

• The Microlog’s status line at the top of theMain menu display should indicate 100% offree memory.

IntroductionHow to Initialize Your Microlog

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 23User Manual

Page 36: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

IntroductionHow to Initialize Your Microlog

Intro - 24 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 37: E-MANUAL

Applications

Standard MicrologMeasurement

Setups

CMVA60 Microlog App - 1User Manual

Page 38: E-MANUAL

How to Use this “Applications” Section

This “Applications” section is designed to help Micrologusers quickly set up the Microlog data collector. In it weuse flow charts and text to describe “standard” Micrologmeasurement settings for performing vibration measure-ments on typical rotating machinery.

¾ These standard settings are provided for“getting started” purposes. The best set-tings for measuring your specific machin-ery may vary. Over time, as yourMicrolog experience increases, youshould modify these standard settings toobtain the best Microlog measurement set-ups for your machinery.

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsHow to Use this “Applications” Section

App - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 39: E-MANUAL

What Is Typical Machinery?

This Applications section describes standard Micrologmeasurement setups for measuring typical machinery.

We realize there is really no such thing as “ typical” ma-chinery. Machine construction, installation, and operationdiffer greatly from one plant to the next, and who’s to saywhat is considered “ typical” . However, there is a generalclass of machinery consisting of machines that are com-monly measured with the same Microlog measurement set-ups. We have classified this machinery group as “ typical”machinery.

Typical Machinery - Typical machinery is consid-ered to be rotating equipment; such as fans, pumps,compressors, motors, or generators operating atspeeds between 600 RPM and 10,000 RPM. All typi-cal machinery has the following components:

shafts couplingsbearings

The Microlog’s measurement setups are nearly identi-cal when measuring components on typical machin-ery (whether the machine is a pump, fan, etc.)Therefore, instead of repeatedly describing identicalMicrolog setups for various machines, we group ma-chines commonly measured with the same Micrologsetups, and describe the standard Microlog setups formeasuring this group of machinery.

¾ Certain applications do not fall into the“ typical” machinery group as they re-quire variations in the Microlog’s stand-ard measurement setups. Specificallyvery low speed and very high speed com-ponents (found in paper machines and

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsWhat Is Typical Machinery?

CMVA60 Microlog App - 3User Manual

Page 40: E-MANUAL

high speed turbomachinery) and recipro-cating machinery require different Microlog measurement setups than typi-cal machinery.

These generalizations may contradict what you consider tobe typical and non-typical machinery classifications. Keepin mind, they are used for organizational purposes only.

What Are Standard Measurements?

Because vibration is considered by many as one of the bestindicators of machinery condition, vibration measurementsare classified as “standard” measurements. Of the fourcommon vibration measurements (acceleration, velocity,displacement, and enveloped acceleration), velocity meas-urements are typically used to detect low frequency rota-tional events (for example, imbalance, misalignment,looseness, shaft bow, etc.) on the majority of rotating ma-chinery.

¾ Historically, velocity measurements havebeen most popular when measuring vibra-tion, however, because of improvementsin accelerometer technology, accelerationmeasurements are becoming more preva-lent.

Velocity - Since velocity is commonly the most frequentlow frequency vibration measurement, the Microlog’sstandard velocity measurement’s setup is the core ofthis Applications section.

A Standard Velocity Measurement flow chart de-scribes Microlog menu selections that set up a stand-ard velocity measurement. This allows the new userto reference the flow chart to quickly and consistently

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsWhat Are Standard Measurements?

App - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 41: E-MANUAL

set up the Microlog for standard velocity measure-ments.

Acceleration measurements are typically used to deter-mine higher frequency rotational problems (for exam-ple, high speed machinery operating above 10,000RPM, and rolling element bearing and gearbox prob-lems).

Enveloped Acceleration (ENV Acc) measurements am-plify low frequency events in high frequency, repeti-tive vibration signals and successfully detect andmeasure rolling element bearing and gearbox prob-lems in early failure stages.

Displacement measurements are commonly used to meas-ure the relative distance between two surfaces. Onlight rotors operating in heavy, stiff casings, most ofthe vibration force is dissipated between the shaft andthe bearing surface, never reaching the housing’s sur-face. In this case, eddy probes and displacementmeasurements are a must.

Standard acceleration, ENV Acc, and displacement meas-urement Microlog setups closely resemble the standard ve-locity measurement’s setup with only a few exceptions. Inthis Applications section, following the velocity measure-ment flow chart, Standard Acceleration, Enveloped Ac-celeration, and Displacement Measurement setupsections describe deviations from a velocity measurement’ssetup (flow chart) that change a velocity measurement intoan acceleration, ENV Acc, or displacement measurement.We find this to be more efficient than repeating the entireflow chart, noting only a few exceptions.

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsWhat Are Standard Measurements?

CMVA60 Microlog App - 5User Manual

Page 42: E-MANUAL

Typical Machinery

Pumps Fans

Generators Motors

Standard Measurements

Velocity

Acceleration

ENV Acc

Displacement

Velocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

AssumptionsIt should be understood that the Standard Velocity Meas-urement flow chart settings are selected with the followingassumptions:

• “Typical” machinery is being measured for de-tection/condition monitoring purposes, not foranalysis purposes.

• “Typical” machinery is being measured for loworder rotational problems (for example, imbal-ance, misalignment, looseness, soft foot, bentshaft, etc.)

• An industry standard 100 mV/g accelerometeris being used. For example: SKF’s CMSS787AAccelerometer.

• Machine speed is greater than 600 RPM.

• Data collection speed is not a major concern.

(operating between 10Hz and 3kHz)

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsVelocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

App - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 43: E-MANUAL

¾ It should be noted that longer measure-ment times often provide more valuabledata.

DeviationsWhen setting up a Microlog measurement, certain optionsettings are determined by the component’s speed and thetype of sensor used, these are:

Type - The measurement Type: option (for example, Ac-celeration, Acc to Vel, Acc to Disp, Velocity, etc.) isdetermined by the measurement’s sensor type and thedesired measurement.

Maximum Freq - The measurement’s maximum fre-quency (Fmax) setting is determined by the measuredcomponent’s speed and the type of defect anticipated.A rule of thumb sets the velocity measurement’sMaximum Freq. to 5 or 6 times the measured com-ponent’s running speed. This allows you to analyzethe measurement’s resulting FFT spectrum up to the5th or 6th harmonic.

For example, when performing a “standard” velocitymeasurement on a non-geared coupling, set Maxi-mum Freq. to the coupling’s running speed multi-plied by a factor of 6.

¾ High speed machinery, gearboxes, androlling element bearings are best meas-ured with acceleration or ENV Acc meas-urements. Reference the StandardAcceleration and ENV Acc Measure-ment sections for help with determiningMaximum Frequency settings for thesecomponents.

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsVelocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

CMVA60 Microlog App - 7User Manual

Page 44: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Standard Microlog Measurement SetupsVelocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

App - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 45: E-MANUAL

Standard VelocityMeasurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 9User Manual

Page 46: E-MANUAL

Overview

Since velocity best measures rotational speed events, thissection uses a flow chart to detail the Microlog’s setup fora standard velocity measurement. This allows the newuser to reference the flow chart to quickly and consistentlyset up the Microlog for standard velocity measurements.

¾ Many users supplement velocity measure-ments with acceleration measurements.This allows a wide-band view of defectfrequencies in addition to the velocitymeasurements’ view of rotational speedevents.

¾ IMPORTANT - Before setting up the Microlog for a standard velocity measure-ment, you may wish to clear the Mi-crolog, then set Microlog Utilitiesoptions. Procedural descriptions follow.

Setting the Microlog’s Utilities Options

¾ The Microlog’s Utilities menu settingsshould be set before setting other Microlog menu options.

Use the following flow chart to set “ standard” Utilitiesmenu options.

¾ Flow chart selections are indicated withblack highlighting.

Standard Velocity MeasurementOverview

App - 10 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 47: E-MANUAL

vl-rputs.pcx

(User preference)

(User preference)

(User preference)

(User preference)

StandardMicrolog

Utilities MenuSettings

Standard Velocity MeasurementSetting the Microlog’s Utilities Options

CMVA60 Microlog App - 11User Manual

Page 48: E-MANUAL

Standard Velocity Measurement Setup

CMVA60 Microlog SetupUse the following flow chart to set up a standard velocitymeasurement.

¾ These standard settings are provided for“getting started” purposes. The best set-tings for performing a velocity measure-ment on your specific machinery mayvary. Over time, as your Microlog experi-ence increases, you should modify thesetypical settings to obtain the best settingsfor your machinery.

¾ Flow chart selections are indicated withblack highlighting.

Standard Velocity MeasurementStandard Velocity Measurement Setup

App - 12 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 49: E-MANUAL

vel-nr-s.pcx

Standard VelocityMeasurement

CMVA60Microlog

Standard Velocity MeasurementStandard Velocity Measurement Setup

CMVA60 Microlog App - 13User Manual

Page 50: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Standard Velocity MeasurementStandard Velocity Measurement Setup

App - 14 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 51: E-MANUAL

StandardAcceleration

Measurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 15User Manual

Page 52: E-MANUAL

Overview

Acceleration measurements are typically used to deter-mine higher frequency rotational problems (for example,high speed machinery operating above 10,000 RPM, androlling element bearing and gearmesh problems).

¾ Many users supplement acceleration meas-urements with velocity measurements.This allows a wide-band view of defectfrequencies in addition to the velocitymeasurements’ view of rotational speedevents.

The following information helps Microlog users set uptheir CMVA60 Microlog to perform acceleration measure-ments on typical machinery.

Standard Acceleration Measurement Setup

To set up the Microlog for a standard acceleration measure-ment, use the Standard Velocity Measurement flowchart’s settings, with these exceptions:

Type: AccelerationLines: 800Low Freq Cutoff: 2 HzStart Freq: 0Maximum Freq:

• For Couplings/Shafts - For measurements onnon-geared couplings and shafts, use the stand-ard velocity measurement’s rule of thumb for set-ting Maximum Frequency: (5 or 6 times therunning speed).

Standard Acceleration MeasurementOverview

App - 16 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 53: E-MANUAL

• For Bearings - When performing accelerationmeasurements on bearings, the MaximumFrequency is determined by the component’sshaft speed. Use the following table to set Maxi-mum Freq:

Shaft Speed Maximum Freq:

< = 1200 RPM 1 kHz1200-2400 RPM 2 kHz2400-3600 RPM 5 kHz

> 3600 RPM 10 kHz

These settings produce FFT spectra that allowanalysis of bearing fault frequencies.

• For Gears - When performing accelerationmeasurements on gearboxes, the Maximum Fre-quency setting is typically set to 4X the calcu-lated gear frequency (determined by the numberof teeth multiplied by the shaft’s RPM) plus10%.

4 (# of teeth x shaft speed) + 10%

In the resulting FFT spectrum, this allows youto see up to the 3rd order harmonics, and side-bands of the 3rd order harmonics.

¾ If sidebands are of interest, use 1600 linesof FFT resolution.

gear frequency

Standard Acceleration MeasurementStandard Acceleration Measurement Setup

CMVA60 Microlog App - 17User Manual

Page 54: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Standard Acceleration MeasurementStandard Acceleration Measurement Setup

App - 18 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 55: E-MANUAL

StandardEnveloped

AccelerationMeasurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 19User Manual

Page 56: E-MANUAL

Overview

Enveloped Acceleration (ENV Acc) measurements suc-cessfully detect and measure rolling element bearing andgearbox problems in early failure stages.

The following information helps Microlog users set uptheir Microlog to perform standard ENV Acc vibrationmeasurements on typical machinery.

Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup

To set up the CMVA60 Microlog for a standard envelopedacceleration measurement, use the Velocity Measurementflow chart settings, with these exceptions:

Lines: 800Type: ENV AccNumber of Averages: 1Detection: Pk to PkLow Freq Cutoff : 0 or .5% of maximum frequency

Selecting the Type field’s ENV Acc option causes an addi-tional field (Env Filter ) to display on the Microlog screen.

Standard Enveloped Acceleration MeasurementOverview

App - 20 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 57: E-MANUAL

envfil.pcx

> To set the Env Filter field:• Move pointer bar to the Env Filter field. • Press MENU to view the choices (Figure 1).

Env Filter: Select 1 of the 4 Env Filter frequencybands as described below.

¾ When selecting an envelope filter fre-quency band, it is very important to knowthe bearing frequency that you are lookingfor.

Figure 1.The ENV Filter Pop-Up Menu.

Standard Enveloped Acceleration MeasurementStandard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup

CMVA60 Microlog App - 21User Manual

Page 58: E-MANUAL

Use the following table to determine which band toselect.

Enveloping Settings Microlog

Frequency Speed AnalyzingFilters Band Range Range

1 5 - 100 Hz 0 - 50 RPM 0 - 10 Hz 2 50 - 1,000 Hz 25 - 500 RPM 0 - 100 Hz 3 500 - 10,000 Hz 250 - 5,000 RPM 0 - 1,000 Hz 4 5,000 - 40,000 Hz 2,500 - ...RPM 0 - 10,000 Hz

Standard Enveloped Acceleration MeasurementStandard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup

App - 22 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 59: E-MANUAL

StandardDisplacementMeasurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 23User Manual

Page 60: E-MANUAL

Overview

Displacement measurements are commonly used to meas-ure the relative distance between two surfaces. On light ro-tors operating in heavy, stiff casings, most of the vibrationforce is dissipated between the shaft and the bearing sur-face, never reaching the housing’s surface. Journal bear-ings (also known as sleeve bearings) are often used inthese situations. These bearings are “ fluid film” type bear-ings (they have no rolling elements). In this case, eddyprobes and displacement measurements are a must.

¾ Because of their accurate low frequencyresponse, eddy probes provide the mostaccurate displacement measurements. Ve-locity sensors provide strong response inthe mid frequency range. Integration of avelocity sensor’s measurement to displace-ment often provides acceptable results. Because of their indirect relation to dis-placement and their poor low frequencysensitivity, double integration of an accel-eration measurement to displacement gen-erally provides poor results.

The following information helps Microlog users set uptheir Microlog to perform standard displacement measure-ments on typical machinery.

Standard Displacement MeasurementOverview

App - 24 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 61: E-MANUAL

Standard Displacement Measurement Setup

To set up the Microlog for a standard displacement meas-urement, use the Velocity Measurement flow chart set-tings, with these exceptions:

Type: Displacement (using eddy probes)

Detection: Pk to Pk

Standard Displacement MeasurementStandard Displacement Measurement Setup

CMVA60 Microlog App - 25User Manual

Page 62: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Standard Displacement MeasurementStandard Displacement Measurement Setup

App - 26 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 63: E-MANUAL

3-9-92 6:30

1The Route Menu

¾ In this Chapter, the word “SET” refers toSET hierarchy items in PRISM2 (DOS) da-tabases, and both SET and machine hierar-chy items in PRISM4 for Windowsdatabases.

The ROUTE Feature of the PRISM Host Software

The PRISM host software’s Route feature allows you tobuild measurement collection sequences (ROUTEs) to helpyou perform the most efficient data collection.

When you originally constructed your PRISM host data-base by the hierarchy method, you more than likely organ-ized the hierarchy by area, by machine type, or by somesimilar grouping. If you downloaded POINTs to the Microlog collector in hierarchy order, a person collectingdata would probably have to “skip around” in the ROUTE,or would have to retrace steps to get to the next data collec-tion POINT in the ROUTE. Even if you design your data-base using a “most efficient ROUTE” method, at the timeof data collection you may want to make changes to aROUTE list or to have a POINT appear in more than oneROUTE.

What is a ROUTE?A ROUTE is a list of POINTs arranged in sequence for themost efficient data collection.

The advantage of ROUTE data collection is that measure-ments can be sequenced for the most efficient data collec-tion regardless of their location in the hierarchy. Thismethod also allows a measurement POINT or POINTs to

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 1User Manual change 01

Page 64: E-MANUAL

appear in many different ROUTEs, and provides for aROUTE Statistics Report.

¾ Refer to your PRISM host software’s UserManual for help with building and trans-ferring PRISM ROUTEs to the Microlog.

Collecting Data

When the Microlog collector is first powered up, the re-verse video pointer bar in the main menu appears on theRoute choice.

> To start a ROUTE:• Press 1 or use the up and down arrow keys to

move the pointer bar to 1:Route and press <EN-TER>. A ROUTE list displays (Figure 1 - 1).

601.pcx

Figure 1 - 1. The ROUTE List Display.

The Route MenuCollecting Data

1 - 2 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 65: E-MANUAL

If ROUTE instructions were entered when theROUTE was created, a line on the screen (such as In-structions #1) displays in the list. Move the pointerbar to the Instructions #1 line and press the <EN-TER> key to view the instructions.

¾ The Microlog’s ROUTE Instructionscreen is limited to a display of 11 lines of29 characters each, even though you are al-lowed to enter more in PRISM4. Addi-tional Instruction pages are automaticallycreated to accommodate displaying alldownloaded instructions. When viewingInstructions page 1, press <ENTER> toview page 2, etc.

If all SETs are closed, it is necessary to open the desiredSET.

> To open a SET and collect data:

• Using the up and down arrow keys, move thepointer bar to the desired SET.

• Using the right arrow key, open the SET.

• Using the up and down arrow keys, move thepointer bar to the desired SET or POINT.

• Press the <ENTER> key to start a measurement.

• Perform static and dynamic measurements.

• Repeat the process for each POINT until the se-quence is complete (an END OF ROUTE mes-sage appears).

• Press <ENTER>to start the next ROUTE (if oneis loaded in the Microlog collector), or press<ESCAPE> to return to the ROUTE list.

The Route MenuCollecting Data

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 3User Manual change 01

Page 66: E-MANUAL

¾ Returning to the ROUTE list allows youto collect measurements elsewhere in thesequence, or to go back to the host com-puter and upload the data you have col-lected.

The Route List

In the Microlog’s ROUTE list, measurements transferredfrom the PRISM host software for collection in ROUTEmode may be stored by hierarchy or by ROUTE name.

An empty NONROUTE SET always appears at the top ofboth ROUTE and hierarchy lists (see Figure 1 - 1). AllNONROUTE and ANALYZER measurements are storedin the NONROUTE SET.

In both hierarchy and ROUTE lists, move the pointer barwith the up and down arrow keys to select a SET, aROUTE, or a specific measurement POINT for measure-ment. When measurements are collected in sequence, thepointer bar moves automatically to the next measurementin the list.

The open/close indicators (equals or hyphen symbols) ap-pear to the left of all subSETs in a hierarchy list. The equalsymbol (=) indicates that a SET is open, displaying subordi-nate SETs and/or POINTs. The minus symbol (-) indicatesthat the SET is closed, concealing all subordinate POINTS.

The leftmost column on the ROUTE list shown in Figure 1- 1 contains the letter N (no data), indicating nothing hasyet been recorded, the letter D (data), indicating a measure-ment has been recorded, or the letter M (messages), indicat-ing an instruction text screen.

Although a ROUTE list is somewhat simpler than a hierar-chy list, the Microlog is able to skip entire machines (ex-

The Route MenuThe Route List

1 - 4 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 67: E-MANUAL

plained later in this chapter) if the POINTs being measuredare in hierarchy form (grouped by machine SETs).

Right and Left Arrow Keys

On a SET - When the pointer bar is on a SET, use the rightand left arrow keys to open and close the SET.

On a POINT - When the pointer bar is on a POINT, usethe right and left arrow keys to move the pointer barto the next SET name or to the previous SET name.

OptionsWith a ROUTE list displayed, press the MENU key. Thepop-up menu displays. Press a numeral on the Microlog’skeypad or move the pointer bar to your selection and pressthe <ENTER> key.

screen13.pcx

Figure 1 - 2.The Options Menu in the CMVA60 Microlog.

The Route MenuThe Route List

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 5User Manual change 01

Page 68: E-MANUAL

Options on the screen of Figure 1 - 2 are:

1:Reenter - Returns the Microlog to the last ROUTEPOINT displayed. Reenter is useful when resumingdata collection after the Microlog has been turned off.

2:Page Up - Places the pointer bar on the ROUTE list atthe same line on the previous page.

3:Page Down - Places the pointer bar on the ROUTE list atthe same line on the next page.

4:Go to Top - Places the first SET, POINT, or ROUTEname that is resident in the Microlog’s memory in thetop line of the ROUTE list.

5:Go to Bottom - Places the pointer bar on the last SET orlast POINT in the last open SET that is resident in theMicrolog’s memory. Note — this may take a coupleof seconds if the downloaded ROUTE is very large.

6:Global Open - In a hierarchy list, this function opens allSETs that are subordinate to the SET indicated by thepointer bar. In a ROUTE list, this function displaysall measurement POINTs.

7:Global Close - In a hierarchy list, this function closes allSETs that are subordinate to the SET indicated by thepointer bar. In a ROUTE list, this function closes allSETs and conceals all measurement POINTs.

¾ SETs and measurement POINTs are auto-matically opened when starting ROUTEcollection.

The Route MenuThe Route List

1 - 6 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 69: E-MANUAL

Static Measurements

The Microlog screen display for static (DC) measurementscontains a drawing of a meter (Figure 1 - 3).

scrn11.pcx

Static measurements (DC volts) collected from a pickup(such as temperature) and measurements entered numeri-cally through the keypad display on this screen. Alarm set-points are marked with arrows on the top edge of the meterand the meter needle moves in response to the value of themeasured signal.

> To record a static measurement from a directly con-nected pickup:

• Press <ENTER>. The value appears on the me-ter and at the same time displays numerically inthe THIS window.

alarm setpoint

Figure 1 - 3. A Static Measurement Screen.

The Route MenuStatic Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 7User Manual change 01

Page 70: E-MANUAL

• Using the up and down arrow keys, adjust thefull scale range, if required.

• When you are satisfied with the measurement’saccuracy, press <ENTER> to record the value.

¾ For manually entered measurements, apointer bar appears in the THIS window.

• Manually enter the observed value through thekeyboard and press <ENTER>. The value en-tered is displayed on the meter.

The data fields on the screen of Figure 1 - 3 are:

ID (top line of Working Area) - Up to 20 characters.

Description (next line under ID) - Up to 32 characters.

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe equipment and the exact locationwhere a measurement is to be recorded.

Date and Time of current measurement.

Current Measurements Value - Overall value of measure-ment for the current measurement.

Last Reading - Overall value of the previous measurement.

Measurement Options Menu (Static)

When the Dynamic Data Point screen is visible on the Mi-crolog, you may press the MENU key to access several op-tions.

The Route MenuMeasurement Options Menu (Static)

1 - 8 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 71: E-MANUAL

To make a selection, press its numeral on the Microlog’skeypad or move the pointer bar to your selection and press<ENTER>.

110.pcx

The Options on the screen of Figure 1 - 4 are:

1:Skip Machine - Moves the pointer bar to the first meas-urement POINT in the next SET. (The list must be ina hierarchy form.)

2:Skip Point - Moves the pointer bar to the next measure-ment POINT.

3:Previous Point - Moves the pointer bar to the previousPOINT.

Figure 1 - 4.The Options Menu for a Speed Measurement.

The Route MenuMeasurement Options Menu (Static)

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 9User Manual change 01

Page 72: E-MANUAL

¾ The pointer bar may be shifted to the pre-vious or next measurement POINT withthe up and down arrow keys when theROUTE list is visible. When the Microlog is in the data acquisition mode,the up and down arrow keys control theamplitude gain range.

4:Make Reading - Used to repeat a measurement. If stillon the correct measurement POINT, this function maybe activated from the function keypad by pressing theRESET MEASMT function key.

5:Coded Notes - Notes on a list are transferred from thePRISM host software database. The list is displayedby selecting Coded Notes.

> To store desired coded notes with the data collected forthe POINT:

• Use the up and down arrow keys to position thepointer bar over the coded note desired.

• Press F1 to store the note code with the data col-lected for the POINT.

¾ Multiple coded notes can be selected forthe same measurement POINT in this fash-ion.

• When all the applicable notes have been se-lected, press <ENTER> to save.

¾ Pressing the <ESCAPE> key aborts theprocess without saving any coded notes.

6:User Note - Allows you to key in a note or an observa-tion in English. The line displayed for User Note has

The Route MenuMeasurement Options Menu (Static)

1 - 10 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 73: E-MANUAL

a capacity of 42 characters, however only the first 30spaces are initially displayed. When the end of the in-itially displayed line is reached, entering more charac-ters causes the line to scroll left in the window untilthe line fills to its capacity of 42 characters. The en-tire 42 character line is saved and transferred to thehost.

¾ At a single measurement POINT, either aUser Note or Coded Note may be re-corded but not both. The most recentUser Note or series of Coded Notes over-write any notes recorded previously forthe same measurement POINT.

7:Manual Read - Allows you to make a manual readingby entering a value through the keypad.

8:View Setup - Displays the current POINT’s setup infor-mation.

9:Delete Data - Erases all data recorded for a POINT.

Dynamic Measurements

You may select either of two methods for displaying dy-namic data collected in a ROUTE. The selection, RouteSpectrum:Show or Route Spectrum:Hide, is made fromthe 6:Route Setup menu in the 8:Utilities main menu (seeChapter 8, Utilities).

In Route Spectrum:Hide, the Dynamic Data Point sum-mary screen is the only screen you will see (Figure 1 - 5).

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 11User Manual change 01

Page 74: E-MANUAL

test.pcx

In Route Spectrum:Show the display shifts to an FFTspectrum (Figure 1 - 6) when the data collection process be-gins.

Figure 1 - 5. A Dynamic Data Point Screen.

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

1 - 12 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 75: E-MANUAL

screen07.pcx

Route Spectrum:Show

> To start the collection process at the ROUTE menu:

• Select 1:Route to display the ROUTE list.

• Using the up and down arrow keys, move thepointer bar to the starting ROUTE name, SETname, or POINT and press <ENTER> to begin.

The Dynamic Data Point screen displays the first POINTof the ROUTE or SET you selected, the SET name in thehierarchy, or the POINT name you selected (see Figure 1 -5).

The data fields on the screen are:

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 9 for descriptions of Dy-namic Data Point fields Id and Descrip-tion.

Figure 1 - 6. An FFT Spectrum Screen.

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 13User Manual change 01

Page 76: E-MANUAL

Date and Time of current measurement.

This - Overall value and unit of measurement for the cur-rent measurement.

Last Reading - Overall value of the previous measurement.

% Change - Percent of change between the current overallvalue and the measurement’s last overall value.

AVG - Number of averages taken. The word DONE ap-pears when all averages have been taken.

Alarms - Alarm values exceeded (i.e., ALARM1,ALARM2).

¾ The Microlog may be programmed to re-cord an FFT spectrum whenever an alarmvalue is exceeded.

BAR GRAPH - A horizontal bar graph, located below thevalue and alarm boxes, graphically displays the over-all value. Alarm setpoints, represented by small verti-cal marks directly below the bar graph, show thephysical relationship between overall value and alarmsetpoints. In Route Spectrum:Hide the overall valueis displayed on the horizontal bar graph throughoutthe data collection process.

Speed TaggingSpeed tagging allows for very accurate speed values for dy-namic Microlog measurements, even in variable speed ma-chinery.

Using PRISM4 software, you can quickly select multiplePOINTs (Microlog dynamic POINTs) from the hierarchylist (these POINTs are referred to as speed tagged POINTs)

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

1 - 14 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 77: E-MANUAL

to associate with (link to) a specific Microlog dynamic ormanual input speed reference POINT.

The speed reference POINT can be a tach POINT, dynamicdata POINT, or manually input speed value. Data collectedfor the speed tagged POINTs reflect the rotating speed oftheir associated speed reference POINT.

¾ For dynamic speed reference POINTs, useeither Order Track frequency type basedPOINTs with a tach, or use Fixed Span fre-quency type and use the Microlog’s SetSpeed (1XRPM) feature to determine thespeed value for the speed referencePOINT and its associated speed taggedPOINTs.

¾ IMPORTANT - The speed referencePOINT (Speed POINT Id) must be col-lected (by the Microlog) prior to collectingits speed tagged dynamic data POINTs.Set up your PRISM4 ROUTE or databasehierarchy to facilitate data collection ofspeed POINTs prior to data collection ofPOINTs associated with speed POINTs.

¾ The speed reference POINT cannot be in-cluded in an MPA group of POINTs, how-ever, dynamic data POINTs linked to thespeed reference POINT may be (see theMulti-POINT Automation section laterin this chapter).

Speed Ratio

The Microlog determines the actual running speed fora linked measurement by multiplying its associatedspeed reference POINT’s speed value by the speed

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 15User Manual change 01

Page 78: E-MANUAL

tagged measurement’s Speed Ratio (specified inPRISM4).

¾ IMPORTANT - The dynamic measure-ment’s Speed Ratio setting must begreater than 0. A 0 setting disables speedtagging. In this case, the measurement’sspeed value is established using the meas-urement’s Speed field setting (manuallyinput in the POINT Setup dialog).

Error Messages

If the linked speed reference POINT does not precedethe speed tagged dynamic data POINT in the Microlog’s ROUTE list, speed tagging is disabled andthe following message appears when attempting to col-lect data for the speed tagged dynamic data POINT:

WARNING!

Running Speed (RPM) point used for SpeedTagged Point (Point Id) has not been down-loaded.

ENTER - to collect data using point setup’s de-fault speed value.

ESC - to abort data collection.

• Press ENTER to collect data. The measure-ment’s speed value is calculated using the meas-urement’s Speed field setting (manually input inthe POINT Setup dialog) multiplied by the meas-urement’s Speed Ratio value. Again, speed tag-ging is disabled.

If the speed reference POINT has been downloaded tothe Microlog in the proper hierarchy position but nodata has been taken on it, the following message ap-

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

1 - 16 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 79: E-MANUAL

pears when attempting to collect data on its associatedspeed tagged dynamic POINTs:

ERROR!

Running Speed (RPM) point used for SpeedTagged Point (Point Id) has not been collected.Please take data on (Point Id) before takingdata on this point.

ESC - to abort data collection.

Speed reference POINT data (RPM) can be re-collected asoften as the user chooses, however, speed tagged POINTslinked to the speed reference POINT are not updated with anew speed value unless they too are re-collected after thespeed reference POINT is re-collected.

> To continue data collection:

Press <ENTER> to start data collection. An FFT screendisplays. The amplitude range, frequency range, and num-ber of averages have already been set in the PRISM hostsoftware’s POINT SETUP screen for all ROUTEPOINTs. For NonRoute POINTs, set these parameters inthe Spectrum Setup screen. Watch the number of aver-ages above the upper left corner of the spectrum display.You will see it advancing 1/N, 2/N, 3/N, etc., indicatingprogress toward a preset number (N) of averages. Averag-ing proceeds to the specified number of averages, then datacollection stops. Upon completion of averaging, press<ENTER> to record the overall value and spectrum and re-turn to the measurement menu.

¾ If you are not satisfied with the amplitudedisplay, you may adjust the full scale am-plitude with the up and down arrow keysduring the averaging process.

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 17User Manual change 01

Page 80: E-MANUAL

Note that a vertical bar graph is present at the right edge ofthe spectrum display. This vertical bar graph displays theoverall value calculated from the spectrum. The alarmmarkers on the side of the bar graph denote alarm levels setin the PRISM host software. Alarm markers are filled in ifthe alarm is exceeded (see Figure 1 - 7), hollow if not ex-ceeded.

Also, note that the word OVERALL appears at the top ofthe spectrum display (Figure 1 - 7). This indicates that thenumerical value to the left of the word OVERALL is theoverall amplitude calculated from the spectrum.

ch6-03.pcx

Pressing the right and left arrow keys moves the cursor onthe spectrum display. At the same time, the word OVER-ALL disappears and the amplitude and frequency at thecursor position displays (Figure 1 - 8).

overall amplitude

overall amplitude

alarmmarker

Figure 1 - 7. Where Overall Amplitude Appears.

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

1 - 18 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 81: E-MANUAL

ch6-02.pcx

Pressing F1 toggles the numerical display from ampli-tude/frequency at the cursor position to overall value andfrom overall value to amplitude/frequency at the cursor po-sition.

When the averaging process completes, collection stopsand the FFT spectrum remains on the screen.

> To save acceptable spectra:• Press <ENTER> (or SAVE) to save and leave

the spectrum display.

¾ If you are not satisfied with the spectrum,you may retake the measurement by press-ing the key labeled RESET MEASMT onthe function keypad. In Route Mode:Nor-

amplitude at the cursor position

frequency at the cursor position

.227

2775.0 Figure 1 - 8.Where Data for the Cursor Position Displays.

Press F1 to toggle to Overall Data.

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 19User Manual change 01

Page 82: E-MANUAL

mal, the Microlog collector returns to thecurrent POINT’s Dynamic Data Pointscreen, from which you may make note en-tries (see the next section: MeasurementOptions Menu). For faster data collec-tion, set the Microlog to RouteMode:Auto in the 8:Utilities main menu.The current POINT’s Dynamic DataPoint screen does not re-display, but theMicrolog proceeds directly to the Dy-namic Data Point screen for the nextPOINT.

Route Spectrum:HideIn Route Spectrum:Hide, the Microlog averages continu-ously and proceeds to the specified number of averages.When the specified number of averages is attained, the Microlog continues to collect data. Each subsequent datasample replaces the earliest sample. This moving averagecontinues until you press <ENTER> a second time to savethe data. Saving data records the overall value—and theFFT spectrum when required.

Route Spectrum:Hide can make ROUTE data collectionsomewhat faster than Route Spectrum:Show. Hideslightly reduces the time required to complete a given num-ber of averages by eliminating the processing required toupdate the FFT spectrum display. In Route Spec-trum:Hide , the overall value is displayed on the horizontalbar graph throughout the data collection process.

When you press <ENTER> to save, status indicators areprovided in the upper right side of the Dynamic DataPoint display indicating the types of data stored.

The Route MenuDynamic Measurements

1 - 20 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 83: E-MANUAL

Letters corresponding to data stored are:

O Overall ValueS FFT SpectrumN NotesP PhaseT Time Domain

Measurement Options Menu (Dynamic)

With the Dynamic Data Point screen visible on the Microlog, you may press the MENU key to access severaloptions.

• To make a selection, press its numeral on the Mi-crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to yourselection and press <ENTER>(see Figure 1 - 4).

The Options on the screen of Figure 1 - 4 are:

1:Skip Machine 5:Coded Notes2:Skip Point 6:User Note3:Previous Point 7:Manual Read4:Make Reading 8:View Setup9:Delete Data

¾ Refer to pages 1-10 and 1-12 for descrip-tions of the above Options Menu choices.

Using a Temporarily Attached Pickup

If a vibration measurement is being made with a temporar-ily attached pickup (such as the CMSS92C handheld vibra-tion probe), the pickup should be placed in contact with themachine before you initiate a measurement with the <EN-TER> key. If the vibration probe is placed in contact withthe machine after the measurement is started, place thepickup in contact with the machine and press

The Route MenuMeasurement Options Menu (Dynamic)

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 21User Manual change 01

Page 84: E-MANUAL

RESET MEASMT or <ESCAPE> and re-take data forthe same POINT again. The new data overwrites the old.

Averaged data can be erased at any time and the averagingprocess restarted from zero by simply taking data for thesame POINT again.

If your handheld probe has an <ENTER> button, you mayperform all tasks requiring the <ENTER> key with thethumb of the hand you are using to hold the probe in place.

Hints for Efficient Data Collection

Reducing KeystrokesAside from the Microlog’s Multi-Point Automation fea-ture described at the end of this chapter, there are otherways the Microlog collector can be set to minimize thenumber of keystrokes required during ROUTE collection.Setting Route Mode:Normal in 6:Route Setup in the8:Utilities main menu (see the Utilities chapter) requiresone keystroke to collect an FFT spectrum, a second key-stroke to exit the FFT display when spectrum averaging iscomplete, and a third keystroke to advance the collector tothe next POINT. When Route Mode:Auto is selected, en-tering a measurement advances the pointer bar to the nextmeasurement POINT without additional keystrokes.

The fastest (but perhaps not the best) way to collectROUTE data is to use the following settings in 8:Utili-ties/Route Setup, see Chapter 8, Utilities:

Route Mode:AutoRoute Spectrum:HideSensor Mode:Always OnRoute Collection:FastAuto Range:Off

The Route MenuHints for Efficient Data Collection

1 - 22 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 85: E-MANUAL

¾ Use AutoRange:Off only when full scalefor each POINT is set to a value largeenough that no overload conditions occur,otherwise AutoRange:On is recognized.

In both Route Spectrum:Hide and Route Spec-trum:Show, you may manually record an FFT spectrum,whether or not required by programming, by pressing theSAVE function key.

Auto RangeThe Microlog collector can be configured for manual(Auto Range:Off) or auto amplitude range (AutoRange:On). See the Utilities chapter for more detail. ForAuto Range:Off, the Microlog sets the amplitude range tothe value downloaded to the Microlog from the PRISMhost software’s database.

The Microlog will not allow dynamic data to be collectedduring overload state. The Microlog reports input signalstoo large for the display with an OVERLOAD SIGNALbanner on the screen, and with the overload indicator (OV)in the center of the status line (top line) of the display. If asignal overload is indicated, the full scale amplitude rangeshould be increased to prevent amplitude errors. Duringdata collection, the full scale amplitude range may be in-creased or decreased from the Dynamic Data Point or FFTdisplays with the up and down arrow keys.

Whether Auto Range:Off or Auto Range:On is set, theamplitude range may always be increased and decreasedmanually during data collection by pressing the up anddown arrow keys.

The Route MenuHints for Efficient Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 23User Manual change 01

Page 86: E-MANUAL

The ProbeIf a magnetic or permanently mounted sensor is not used,it is important that you hold the probe steady and with evenpressure. The Microlog’s high speed acquisition requiresonly a few seconds to collect the averaged FFT spectrumthat experience has demonstrated is necessary for accuratetrending and analysis.

If the vibration probe loses contact or if you are forced todiscontinue collection averages for other reasons, such asan ambient temperature too hot to continue holding theprobe in place, the averaging process can be stopped at anytime by pressing <ENTER>. Recognizing this possibility,the Microlog divides by the number of averages actuallycollected rather than by the number specified. Thus, as anFFT spectrum is being averaged, the values stored and dis-played are accurate for the number of averages collected upto that point. If the averaging process has to be stopped af-ter three or four averages, the reduction in accuracy is usu-ally minimal.

To Make An On-the-Spot Analysis

You may do a preliminary analysis on collected FFT Spec-tra. A movable cursor, controlled by left and right arrowkeys, is provided to give you an accurate value of both am-plitude and frequency of individual spectral components onthe Microlog’s display.

Digital values of amplitude, frequency, and multiple of OR-DER of machine running speed at the cursor position aredisplayed in the lines directly above the spectrum.

If running speed was not set correctly in the host or is notthe actual running speed (for example, in a variable speedmachine), running speed may be set from the spectrum dis-play.

The Route MenuTo Make An On-the-Spot Analysis

1 - 24 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 87: E-MANUAL

> To set running speed from the spectrum display:

• Place the cursor on the component in the spec-trum identified as running speed.

• Press the 1XRPM key.

The order displayed above the spectrum changes to 1.0.The speed established is recorded with the spectrum andtransferred back to the host computer as a permanent re-cord of actual running speed at the time the spectrum wascollected. This ensures orders are correctly listed on anysubsequent printouts.

¾ FAM marker frequencies are also updatedusing the new running speed.

Several other valuable analyzer functions are initiated bypressing labeled keys in the function keypad. Applicablekeys and their functions are described in the Analyzerchapter.

Spectral Banding

Spectral Banding provides alert and danger alarms onboth peak and overall spectral values within a defined fre-quency band.

The Microlog has the capability to process and display upto 12 spectral bands that have been pre-defined and down-loaded from a PRISM host software database.

On the Microlog, defined spectral bands appear on the dis-played spectrum. Peak values and setpoints appear asdashed lines, while Overall values and setpoints appear assolid lines.

¾ In order to view spectral bands, the Microlog’s 8:Utilities menu Route Spec-trum option must be set to Show.

The Route MenuSpectral Banding

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 25User Manual change 01

Page 88: E-MANUAL

¾ The overall for each band is calculated us-ing the same detection method (RMS,Peak to Peak, or Peak) as specified for thePOINT’s overall.

An A or D is displayed above the Peak Level line or Over-all Level line when an alarm condition occurs.

A - AlertD - Danger.

At any time during data collection, press the PgDn key toview the Spectral Band Setup. Information on the Spec-tral Band Setup screen includes:

From (CPM) - The spectral band’s low frequency limit inCPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

To (CPM) - The spectral band’s high frequency limit inCPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Dan - The band’s peak danger level (alarm limit). Setin the PRISM host software.

Pk Wrn - The band’s peak alert level (alarm limit). Set inthe PRISM host software.

Ov Dan - The band’s overall danger level (alarm limit).Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Wrn - The band’s overall alert level (alarm limit). Setin the PRISM host software.

Band Pk - The band’s current highest peak level. Updatedfor every new FFT data buffer.

The Route MenuSpectral Banding

1 - 26 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 89: E-MANUAL

Band Ov - The band’s current overall level. Calculated us-ing the following equation:

OA =

√ ∑ (Fi ) 2

i = low

high

√NBF

Where:

OA = overall level of vibrationlow = index of the band’s first FFT linehigh = index of the band’s last FFT lineFi = amplitude of each of the FFT linesNBF = noise bandwidth for window chosen

Noise Bandwidth:

Chosen Window NBFUniform 1.0Flat Top 3.782893Hanning 1.499512

Status - Displays alarm status as follows:

OvD - Overall danger. Shown when the band’s over-all level >= the overall danger limit.

PkD - Peak danger. Shown when the band’s peaklevel >= the peak danger limit.

OvA - Overall alert. Shown when the band’s overalllevel >= the overall alert limit.

PkA - Peak alert. Shown when the peak level >=thepeak alert limit.

OK - No Alarms.

The Route MenuSpectral Banding

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 27User Manual change 01

Page 90: E-MANUAL

¾ After saving spectral band data (by press-ing the SAVE button), the spectrum withspectral bands displayed may be viewedusing the Review Menu and printed usingthe Reports Menu. This report includesDynamic Points Report with bands dis-played and a second page containing aSPECTRAL BANDING SUMMARY .This summary contains the same informa-tion as the Spectral Band Setup informa-tion.

When alarm levels are exceeded, spectral band alarms aredisplayed and saved for reporting in the Microlog’s Excep-tions report. Spectral band alarms are not uploaded toPRISM2, instead, once data is uploaded, PRISM2 recalcu-lates the spectral bands and generates alarms for POINTsexceeding spectral band alarm levels.

Downloading FAM Information

¾ FAM information must be set up inPRISM4 before downloading to the Mi-crolog.

The Microlog has the capability to process and displaybearing fault frequency information associated withPOINTs that have been pre-defined and downloaded froma PRISM host software database.

> To download FAM data from PRISM4:• From the Microlog’s Main menu, press 3 or

move the pointer bar to 3:Transfer and press<ENTER>. The Transfer screen appears andthe Microlog is ready to communicate with itshost.

The Route MenuDownloading FAM Information

1 - 28 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 91: E-MANUAL

• From PRISM4’s Transfer menu, select Down-load/From ROUTE List or Download/FromActive Hierarchy.

• Check the Download FAM Information checkbox and click the dialog’s checkmark commandbutton. FAM information is downloaded alongwith the ROUTE to the connected Microlog.

When collecting data for a FAM POINT, the Micrologautomatically overlays up to four multiples of bearing faultfrequency marker. For example, up to four multiples ofeach BPFI are displayed first, pressing the PGDN key dis-plays up to four more BPFI multiples. When there are nomore BPFI multiples, then up to four multiples of BPFOare displayed, etc. Bearing fault freq. markers are labeled(as defined in PRISM4) as multiples of FTF, BSF, BPFO,and BPFI (Figure 1 - 9).

fam-1.pcx

bearing identifierfor the bearingfault frequencymarkers

Figure 1 - 9.Spectrum Displaying Fault Frequency Labels.

The Route MenuDownloading FAM Information

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 29User Manual change 01

Page 92: E-MANUAL

The Microlog places each FAM marker above the highestpeak in the marker’s frequency range (center freq. +/-(bandwidth / 2)).

¾ Center freq. calculation is Speed Taggingcompatible.

When a new running speed is selected, press 1XRPM to re-calculate FAM marker locations.

• Press <ENTER> to save data. The FAM NU-MERICAL screen displays (Figure 1 - 10).

fam-2.pcx

FAM NUMERICAL screen fields are:

LABEL - The bearing Identifier and Label as defined inPRISM4.

Figure 1 - 10. The FAM NUMERICAL Screen.

The Route MenuDownloading FAM Information

1 - 30 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 93: E-MANUAL

AMPLITUDE - The amplitude at which the highest peakoccurs within the FAM center freq. and bandwidth fre-quency range.

FREQUENCY - The frequency at which the highest peakoccurs within the FAM center freq. and bandwidth fre-quency range.

• Press <ESCAPE> to return to the DynamicData Point screen.

> To view the POINT’s FAM information:• At the Dynamic Data Point display, press

MENU , the Options pop-up menu displays.Press 8 or move the pointer bar to 8:View Setupand press <ENTER>. The POINT DESCRIP-TION screen displays.

• Press F3, the FAM Data Setup screen displays(Figure 1 - 11).

fam-4.pcx

Figure 1 - 11. The FAM Data Setup Screen.

The Route MenuDownloading FAM Information

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 31User Manual change 01

Page 94: E-MANUAL

FAM Number - The Microlog assigns this number sequen-tially, according to the number of fault frequencies de-fined in PRISM4 for this POINT.

The remaining information displays as defined in PRISM4

for each fault frequency.

• To view information for additional pre-definedfault frequencies, press the right/left arrow keys.

• Press ESCAPE to return to the Dynamic DataPoint screen.

Multi-Point Automation (MPA)

The CMVA60 Microlog data collector allows the user toconfigure up to 12 measurements for automatic data collec-tion at one measurement point. Using the same sensor, theuser need press only one button to sequentially collect allpre-configured measurements.

¾The speed reference POINT cannot be in-cluded in an MPA group of POINTs, how-ever, dynamic data POINTs linked to thespeed reference POINT may be.

MPA ROUTE Setup

> To set up a MPA ROUTE:• In your PRISM software, access the Point Setup

screen. The Point Setup screen’s Descriptionfield is used to identify MPA POINTs. The first4 characters in the Description field identify theMPA group to which the POINT being config-ured belongs. For MPA POINTs, the first char-acter in the Description field is always "@". The@ character must be followed by three alpha/nu-

The Route MenuMulti-Point Automation (MPA)

1 - 32 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 95: E-MANUAL

meric characters that identify the group of MPAPOINTs. For example;

@MT1 VELOCITY@MT1 ACCEL@MT1 ACC ENV

are legal Descriptions for three MPA POINTs col-lected at the same location on a motor. For threeadditional POINTs collected at a second locationon the motor;

@MT2 VELOCITY@MT2 ACCEL@MT2 ACC ENV

might be appropriate Descriptions.

¾ If more than 12 POINTs are defined, theCMVA60 collects data for the first 12MPA POINTs and the remaining MPAPOINTS are ignored.

MPA Group Data Collection

When the Microlog collector is first powered up, the re-verse video pointer bar in the main menu appears on the1:Route choice. Press <ENTER> to display the ROUTElist.

• Highlight and press <ENTER> to select theROUTE to collect.

While collecting POINTs in a ROUTE, when the Mi-crolog encounters an MPA group of POINTs, it auto-matically displays the MPA data collection screen(Figure 1 - 12).

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 33User Manual change 01

Page 96: E-MANUAL

mpascr.pcx

• With the highlight at the top of the list, press<ENTER> to automatically collect all MPAPOINTs in the group.

¾ Before pressing <ENTER> to collectdata, you can move the highlight to vari-ous POINTs in the MPA group to displaydetails for the highlighted POINT in thescreen’s CURRENT MEASUREMENTsection. However, be sure to return to thetop of the list before pressing <ENTER>,as data collection proceeds from the high-lighted POINT.

Figure 1 - 12.An MPA Data Collection Screen.

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

1 - 34 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 97: E-MANUAL

¾ Depending on the View MPA Spectrumsetting in Utilities/Route Setup, the Mi-crolog displays the corresponding spec-trum (including any FAM or spectral bandinformation) allowing the operator to in-spect and verify that data is correct. PressSAVE to continue collecting data for theremaining triaxial MPA POINTs or press<ESCAPE> to cancel data collection.

¾ If a non-MPA POINT is encounteredwithin an MPA group, data collection willstop for the remaining MPA POINTs.When the next MPA POINT is encoun-tered, it is considered a new MPA group.

MPA Data Collection screen items are:

A list of all POINTs in the MPA group (maximum of 12).When data collection is complete for all POINTs theword DONE appears at the bottom of the list.

Value - Stored overall value for this measurement.

Units - Units for this measurement.

Alarms - Highest alarm value exceeded for this measure-ment.

Current Measurement Information

ID - Identifies the current POINT’s name.

DESC - A brief description of the identified POINT.

THIS - Overall value of the current measurement.

LAST - Overall value of the previous measurement.

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 35User Manual change 01

Page 98: E-MANUAL

ALARMS - Highest alarm value exceeded. Example: ifA1 and A2 exists, A2 is displayed.

¾ MPA alarm indicator strings are consistentwith PRISM2 and PRISM4 for Windows.Alarm indicator strings are:A1 = Overall Alarm 1A2 = Overall Alarm 2a = Banding Peak Alertd = Banding Peak DangerA = Banding Overall AlertD = Banding Overall Danger

AVG - Displays the number of averages during data collec-tion for each MPA POINT and displays DONE whenthe MPA POINT is done.

% Change - Percent of change between the current overallvalue and the measurement’s last overall value.

BAR GRAPH - A horizontal bar graph located below theCURRENT MEASUREMENT information graphi-cally displays the overall value. Alarm setpoints, rep-resented by small vertical marks directly below thebar graph, show the physical relationship betweenoverall value and alarm setpoints.

OptionsCertain MPA options are available.

• With the MPA data collection screen displayed,press the MENU key. The Options pop-upmenu displays. Press a numeral on the Mi-crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to yourselection and press <ENTER>.

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

1 - 36 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 99: E-MANUAL

mpaopt.pcx

MPA Options are:

1:Skip Machine - Skips all MPA POINTs and subsequentPOINTs in current Machine and proceeds to the nextmachine in ROUTE.

2:Skip MPA Set - Skips all MPA POINTs and proceeds tothe next POINT, or group of POINTs, in the ROUTE.

3:Previous MPA Set/Point - Moves the pointer bar to theprevious MPA Set/POINT.

¾ The pointer bar may be shifted to the pre-vious or next measurement MPAGroup/POINT with the up and down ar-row keys when the ROUTE list is visible.When the Microlog is in the data acquisi-tion mode, the up and down arrow keyscontrol the amplitude gain range.

4:Coded Notes - Notes on a list are transferred from thePRISM host software database. The list is displayedby selecting Coded Notes.

Figure 1 - 13. The MPA Options Menu.

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 37User Manual change 01

Page 100: E-MANUAL

¾ PRISM4 allows inputing a 38 characterCoded Note. The Microlog’s CodedNote screen displays only the first 27 char-acters of the Coded Note downloadedfrom the PRISM software.

> To store desired coded notes with the data collected forthe POINT:

• Use the up and down arrow keys to position thepointer bar over the coded note desired.

• Press F1 to store the note code with the data col-lected for the MPA POINT.

¾ Multiple coded notes can be selected forthe same measurement MPA POINT inthis fashion.

• When all the applicable notes have been se-lected, press <ENTER> to save.

¾ Pressing the <ESCAPE> key aborts theprocess without saving any coded notes.

5:User Note - Allows you to key in a note or an observa-tion in English. The line displayed for User Note hasa capacity of 42 characters, however only the first 30spaces are initially displayed. When the end of the in-itially displayed line is reached, entering more charac-ters causes the line to scroll left in the window untilthe line fills to its capacity of 42 characters. The en-tire 42 character line is saved and transferred to thehost.

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

1 - 38 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 101: E-MANUAL

¾ At a single measurement MPA POINT,either a User Note or Coded Note may berecorded but not both. The most recentUser Note or series of Coded Notes over-write any notes recorded previously forthe same measurement MPA POINT.

6:View Setup - Summarizes all information related to thecurrent MPA POINT.

7:Delete MPA Set Data - Erases all data recorded for allof the POINTs in the current MPA Group.

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 39User Manual change 01

Page 102: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

The Route MenuMPA Group Data Collection

1 - 40 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 103: E-MANUAL

3-9-92 8:55 S.G.

2The NonRoute Menu

Overview

NONROUTE allows you to take data at measurementPOINTs which have not been previously downloaded tothe Microlog from PRISM host software.

SetupTo simplify the setup procedure, two User Modes are avail-able, Analysis and Normal. These modes are selectedfrom the System Setup menu in the 8:Utilities function(see the Utilities chapter).

User Mode:Analysis provides access to all Analyzerfunctions.

User Mode:Normal simplifies Analyzer operationby hiding option values for a number of options usedprimarily for highly specialized analyses.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 1User Manual

Page 104: E-MANUAL

01.pcx

In NonRoute (Figure 2 - 1), you can perform the requiredsetup in your Microlog collector and immediately collectdata without returning to your host computer. The meas-urement set up in the Microlog at the time of data collec-tion is transferred to the host and can be merged into yourpermanent PRISM host software database.

With the following two exceptions, NonRoute is identicalto Route as described in the Chapter 1, The RouteMenu.

• The information necessary to define a measure-ment POINT must be manually programmedinto the Microlog.

• The Measurement Options menu (Figure 2 -2) does not include Skip Point, Skip Machine,and Previous Point (see Figure 1 - 4), whichare not applicable for NonRoute.

Figure 2 - 1.The CMVA60 Microlog Main Menu.

The NonRoute MenuOverview

2 - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 105: E-MANUAL

screen46.pcx

Types of Measurements

Four types of measurements may be configured and col-lected in NonRoute mode (Figure 2 - 3).

02.pcx

1:Dynamic - A vibration or AC voltage. Corresponds tovibration dynamic data collected in Route.

Figure 2 - 2.The NonRoute ProcessPoint Options Menu.

Figure 2 - 3. The NonRoute Menu.

The NonRoute MenuTypes of Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 3User Manual

Page 106: E-MANUAL

2:Process - A static value in DC volts, such as tempera-ture, obtained with a directly connected pickup, orread from an installed instrument and entered manu-ally through the keypad.

3:HFD (High Frequency Detection) - A dynamic highfrequency input from an accelerometer for assessingthe condition of rolling element ball or roller bear-ings. The HFD measurement has a detected overallvalue from 5 KHz to 60 KHz but does not record aspectrum.

4:Running Speed - Pulse input proportional to rotatingfrequency or enter manually using the keypad.

Dynamic Measurements (Overview)

> To set up for taking dynamic measurements:• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer

bar to 2:NonRoute and press < ENTER> .The screen in Figure 2 - 3 displays.

• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Dynamicand press < ENTER> . The screen in Figure 2- 4 displays.

The NonRoute MenuDynamic Measurements (Overview)

2 - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 107: E-MANUAL

03.pcx

Dynamic screen menus are:

1:Take Data - Samples and displays data according to theconfiguration of the Setup menus.

2:Input Setup - Displays fields for designating thePOINT ID and Description, measurement type, fullscale range, units, type of detection, input sensitivity,low frequency cut-off, and RPM.

3:Spectrum Setup - FFT configuration such as lines ofresolution, measurement type, frequency range, num-ber of averages, average type, average mode, averageoverlap, and window type.

4:Display Setup - Defines type of trace (single or dual),type of display (magnitude, time, phase), full scale ofthe vertical (phase) axis, and cursor type.

Figure 2 - 4. The Dynamic Menu.

The NonRoute MenuDynamic Measurements (Overview)

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 5User Manual

Page 108: E-MANUAL

5:Trigger Setup - (In User Mode:Analysis only) Config-ures trigger mode, trigger source, trigger slope, trig-ger level, trigger delay, and number of pulses perrevolution.

¾ The length per revolution function has notyet been implemented.

6:Marker Setup - (In User Mode:Analysis only) Allowsselection of harmonic, relative, or sideband markers.The fundamental marker may be positioned by cursorlocation or by key entry of frequency.

Input Setup

The Input Setup menu contains fields for recording IDand Description, designating type of measurement, fullscale range, detection method, transducer sensitivity, lowfrequency cutoff, and RPM.

04.pcx

Figure 2 - 5. The Input Setup Fields.

The NonRoute MenuInput Setup

2 - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 109: E-MANUAL

> To access the Input Setup menu:• At the Dynamic menu, press 2 or move the

pointer bar to 2:Input Setup and press < EN-TER> (Figure 2 - 5).

Input Setup fields are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe equipment and the exact locationwhere a measurement is to be recorded.

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press < ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Type).

¾ In Analyzer mode (from the main menu),the ID field is generally not filled until adisplayed dynamic signal is to be re-corded (saved). At that time pressing theSAVE key causes a window to appear onthe dynamic display in which the ID maybe entered (Figure 2 - 6).

The NonRoute MenuInput Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 7User Manual

Page 110: E-MANUAL

07.pcx

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity,displacement, volts, pressure, SEE, or envelope)which depends upon the type of seismic sensor used(accelerometer, velocity pickup, proximity probe, orSEE sensor) is required to establish integration re-quirements for the FFT calculation. Press MENU toview the choices.

• Select your choice for Type of measurementwith the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Full Scale).

¾ If you selected ENV Acc or ENV Vel, anadditional field displays named ENV Fil-ter.

Figure 2 - 6. Field To Enter POINT ID.

The NonRoute MenuInput Setup

2 - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 111: E-MANUAL

ENV Filter - Press MENU to view the choices.

5 Hz - 100 Hz 50 Hz - 1 KHz500 Hz - 10 KHz 5 KHz - 40 KHz

• Select your choice of filter range and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - The units for this field were automatically de-termined when you selected Type:.

• Enter a numerical full scale value and press< ENTER> . (Note that this value may also bealtered, when in the spectrum display, with theup and down arrow keys.). The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (Detec-tion).

¾ If the number 0.0 is entered for the FullScale entry, autoranging and autoscalingresult.

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

The following table lists the Microlog’s method of sig-nal detection and scaling for overall dynamic measure-ments. Note that acceleration, velocity, anddisplacement values obtained from an accelerometeror velocity pickup are always scaled from RMS detec-tion. This replicates the measurement method usedwith most older instruments so newer Microlog re-corded values remain equivalent.

The NonRoute MenuInput Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 9User Manual

Page 112: E-MANUAL

DETECTION

INPUT OUTPUT Peak Pk to Pk RMS

Acceleration Acceleration Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Acceleration Velocity Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Acceleration Displacement Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Velocity Velocity Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Velocity Displacement Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Displacement Displacement TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

Voltage Voltage TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

Pressure Pressure TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

SEE SEE TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

ENV/ACC ENV/ACC TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

ENV/VEL ENV/VEL TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS, or Pkto Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Input ).

The NonRoute MenuInput Setup

2 - 10 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 113: E-MANUAL

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) perEngineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on the screen(Low Freq Cutoff ).

Low Freq Cutoff - Enter the low frequency cutoff desiredfor the spectrum display. The overall value is com-puted based on the spectral components within the in-terval between low frequency cutoff and themaximum frequency.

• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (RPM).

RPM - Enter nominal running speed of the machine fromwhich data is being acquired and press < ENTER> .

¾ The Microlog computes the RPM of themachine, displays it on the spectrumscreen, uses it to calculate orders, storesit with the dynamic data, and transfers itto the host. For triggered points, the Microlog sets RPM equal to tachometerpulse rate/pulses per revolution, as set inthe trigger setup. For non-triggeredpoints, the Microlog sets RPM equal tothe value in this Input Setup screen un-less the 1XRPM key is pressed duringspectrum display. If so, the Microlog setsRPM equal to the frequency at the cursor.

• Press <ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamicsetup selection menu.

The NonRoute MenuInput Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 11User Manual

Page 114: E-MANUAL

Spectrum Setup

The Spectrum Setup screen contains fields for recordingnumber of lines of resolution, measurement type, startingand maximum frequency, number of averages, averagetype, average mode, average overlap, and spectrum win-dow type.

13.pcx

> To access the Spectrum Setup menu:• At the Dynamic menu, press 3 or move the

pointer bar to 3:Spectrum Setup and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar displays onLines (Figure 2 - 7).

Figure 2 - 7. The Spectrum Setup Fields.

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup

2 - 12 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 115: E-MANUAL

Lines - Lines determines the basic resolution of the spec-trum. Press MENU to view the choices.

frequency rangelines resolution = frequency seqment size

1,000 Hz400 lines = 2.5 Hz

If, for example, you choose 400 lines and a frequencyrange from 0 to 1,000 Hz, the basic resolution of thespectrum will be 1,000 divided by 400 or 2.5 Hz.

This means that the x-axis is divided into 400 seg-ments spaced 2.5 Hz apart.

¾ Recognize that increased resolution re-quires increased time for data collectionand consumes more storage memory.

• Select your choice for number of Lines of reso-lution with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Measurement Type).

Measurement Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Frequency - Sets the horizontal axis of the spectrumdisplay in units of frequency.

Orders - Sets the horizontal axis of the spectrum dis-play in orders (multiples of running speed). Requiresan external 1XRPM trigger that is phase referenced tothe rotating shaft.• Select your choice for Measurement Type with

the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Start Freq).

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 13User Manual

Page 116: E-MANUAL

¾ The Spectrum Setup screens differ de-pending on which of the MeasurementTypes you choose: Frequency or Orders.Each choice is discussed under a separateheading below.

Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

Measurement Type:Freq sets the horizontal axis of thespectrum display in units of frequency.

15.pcx

Figure 2 - 8. The Start Freq Field.

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

2 - 14 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 117: E-MANUAL

Measurement Type:Freq fields are:

Start Freq - The start frequency for the horizontal axis ofthe spectrum display. Any start frequency less thanmaximum frequency may be entered.

¾ The actual start frequency may differfrom your entered value. The Micrologselects a start frequency close to your en-tered value but based on its zoom algo-rithm.

• Enter your choice of initial or start frequency ofthe FFT spectrum and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Maximum Freq).

Maximum Freq - Enter any maximum frequency for thehorizontal axis of the spectrum display less than orequal to 20,000 Hz or 1,200,000 CPM.

• Enter the maximum frequency of the FFT spec-trum in Hz or CPM and press < ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Number of Averages).

Number of Averages - If Average Type is Pk Hold, setNumber of Averages:1, and set AverageMode:Cont. Since Average Mode:Cont is chosen,the peak value is updated for each spectrum ensemble.

If Average Type is Average, set Number of Aver-ages:6. This is a reasonable number of spectrum av-erages to allow a POINT measurement to be made inless than 10 seconds.

If an external trigger is available (time synchronousaveraging is allowable in Average Type), set Num-ber of Averages to achieve adequate signal-to-noise

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 15User Manual

Page 118: E-MANUAL

enhancement in the time domain (from 4 to above200 depending on how close the conflicting signalsare).

• Enter the number of spectrum ensembles to besummed (between 1 and 9999).

• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (AverageType).

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Off - Produces the same results as setting AverageType:Average and Number of Averages:1. TheFFT displays components scaled by the selectedmethod of detection and updates at its maximum, real-time rate.

Average - The summation of the magnitude of eachspectral line is divided by the total number of aver-ages (ensemble averaging). This is the most fre-quently used method of averaging for routine datacollection and analysis.

Pk Hold - Peak Hold holds the highest value receivedat each spectral line during the averaging time. Thismethod of averaging is very useful when the signalcontains a great deal of amplitude variation and theprimary objective of the analysis is to see the maxi-mum reached by each component.

¾ For time waveforms, Average Type:Aver-age and Average Type:Pk Hold are notrecommended. Use Average Type:SyncTime instead.

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

2 - 16 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 119: E-MANUAL

Sync(hronous) Time - Averaging in the time do-main. This method of averaging requires a referencetrigger. Components within the signal which are syn-chronous with the reference trigger are reinforced,while noise quickly averages out. Synchronous timedomain averaging produces the most improvement insignal to noise ratio, and is advantageous whenever itis deemed necessary to extract very low amplitude sig-nals or to minimize the “noise” produced by the vi-bration of other machines nearby. When this methodof averaging is selected, the spectrum produced anddisplayed is the FFT of the averaged synchronoustime domain samples.

¾ To display Sync(hronous) Time averag-ing set the Trigger Source to External.

• Select your choice for Average Type with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Average Mode).

Average Mode - Select the type of FFT average comple-tion. Press MENU to view the choices.

Cont(inuous) - Averaging of the latest N samples,where N is the number of averages selected for thesample. Equivalent to exponential averaging wherethe latest spectrum ensemble replaces the oldest inthe averaged sum.

Finite - Averaging proceeds for N samples. The aver-aging process stops and the result is displayed. (Thisis the averaging mode in Route Spectrum:Show dur-ing Route data collection.)

Repeat - Averaging proceeds for N samples, where Nis the number of averages you chose for the sample.

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 17User Manual

Page 120: E-MANUAL

The spectrum average is displayed after N samplesare taken. The display is updated after each finite av-erage.

• Select your choice for Average Mode with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Average Overlap).

Average Overlap - Overlap processing is advantageouswhen the time required to gather a time record ismuch longer than the time needed to calculate anFFT spectrum. In the Microlog this occurs at fre-quencies below 1,000 Hz (60,000 CPM).

For lower frequencies, the amount of overlap can beincreased to reduce the time required to collect agiven number of averages. Recognize, however, thatthe greater the overlap, the more information sharedbetween averages. Press MENU to view the choices.

Max - Uses whatever data is in the time record at thetime. This can be existing data, new data, or a mix-ture depending on how long it takes to collect time re-cord data. Results in the shortest averaging time butmay lack statistical accuracy.

75% - Uses 75% of existing data and 25% of newdata to calculate new FFT.

50% - Uses 50% of existing data and 50% of newdata to calculate new FFT.

None - Each spectrum ensemble is new data added tothe sum.

Overlap processing is used to obtain enough new en-semble data for an accurate average. If the maximumfrequency is low and the FFT process time is fast, theaverage sum would include a high percent of old data

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

2 - 18 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 121: E-MANUAL

with maximum overlap. Below 2 kHz, 50% overlapand six averages is a reasonable ROUTE setup.

• Select your choice for Average Overlap withthe pointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Window).

Window - The type of window used in the FFT process-ing. A window function must be applied to any peri-odic time record prior to performing an FFT tominimize leakage errors. The Hanning and Flat Topwindow functions attenuate to zero both the leadingand trailing edges of the time domain buffer (to pre-vent leakage error caused by discontinuities in thetime record). Press MENU to view the choices.

Hanning - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-tion that provides better frequency resolution thanFlat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy. Use-ful for machine vibration measurements, general pur-pose measurements, and measurements containingrandom noise.

Uniform - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-tion with uniform weighting across time. Useful formeasuring transients or mechanical response measure-ments and in tracking mode.

Flat Top - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-tion which provides the best amplitude accuracy formeasuring discrete frequency components. Usefulfor calibration or machine vibration measurements us-ing displacement probes in fluid-film bearings.

• Select your choice for Window with the pointerbar and press < ENTER> .

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 19User Manual

Page 122: E-MANUAL

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamicsetup selection menu.

Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders

Measurement Type:Orders - Sets the spectrum display’shorizontal axis in orders (multiples of running speed). Re-quires an external 1XRPM trigger that is phase referencedto the rotating shaft.

Magnitude and absolute phase relative to the shaft refer-ence are plotted against orders (multiples of runningspeed). The advantage of this mode is that running speedcan drastically change, but the vibration amplitude andphase components are always plotted in the same orderedposition. In this mode, a low pass filter tracks runningspeed with cutoff frequency set by the menu selection ofmaximum orders. This ordered data of phase and ampli-tude in conjunction with the PRISM host software allowsfor an ordered vector polar plot.

> To set Measurement Type:Orders fields:• At the Measurement Type: field, select Or-

ders with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Number of Orders,Figure 2 - 9).

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders

2 - 20 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 123: E-MANUAL

23.pcx

Measurement Type:Orders fields are:

Number of Orders - This function, used in conjunctionwith a tachometer input, sets the number of orders tofull scale on the horizontal display.

• Enter any number which, when multiplied byrunning frequency, is less than 20,000 Hz andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Number of Aver-ages).

Figure 2 - 9. The Number of Orders Field.

The NonRoute MenuSpectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 21User Manual

Page 124: E-MANUAL

¾ Refer to pages 2 - 15 through 2 - 19 fordescriptions of Spectrum Setup/Meas-urement Type:Orders fields:

Number of Averages Average OverlapAverage Type WindowAverage Mode

Display Setup

> To access the Display Setup screen:• At the Dynamic menu, press 4 or move the

pointer bar to 4:Display Setup and press < EN-TER> . The Display Setup screen displays(Figure 2 - 10).

36.pcx

Figure 2 - 10.The Display Setup Menu.

The NonRoute MenuDisplay Setup

2 - 22 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 125: E-MANUAL

Display Setup fields are:

Trace - The dual screen option is advantageous wheneverthe frequency and time domain both contain valuableinformation and need to be viewed simultaneously(Figure 2 - 11). Press MENU to view the choices.

371.pcx

¾ When you SAVE a dual trace, more mem-ory is used because you are saving dualscreens.

• Select your choice of Trace with the pointer barand press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen.

¾ Depending on your selection of Trace,continue with the section headed DisplaySetup/Trace: Single or with the sectionheaded Display Setup/Trace:Dual.

Figure 2 - 11. A Dual Screen Display.

The NonRoute MenuDisplay Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 23User Manual

Page 126: E-MANUAL

Display Setup/Trace: Single

Trace:Single fields are:

Screen 1 - The primary display, normally a magnitudespectrum, should be selected for screen 1. PressMENU to view the choices.

• Select Magnitude (spectrum), Time (time do-main waveform), or Phase (spectrum) with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Phase Type).

Phase Type - (User Mode:Analysis only) These twochoices are provided to enable selecting a display con-forming to the user’s standard convention. PressMENU to view the choices.

• Select Phase Type with the pointer bar andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Cursor Type).

Cursor Type - The full width cross is easiest to observeand recommended for use. Press MENU to view thechoices.

• Select Cursor Type with the pointer bar andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (X Axis Label).

X Axis Label - Allows time data to be displayed in de-grees as a multiple of the machine rotation (for exam-ple: 360, 720 degrees) or in milliseconds.

The NonRoute MenuDisplay Setup/Trace: Single

2 - 24 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 127: E-MANUAL

To display in degrees, Spectrum Setup/FrequencyType must be set to Orders, and DisplaySetup/Screen 1 or 2 must be set to Time. PressMENU to view the choices.

• Select Degrees or MSec with the pointer barand press < ENTER> .

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamicsetup selection menu.

Display Setup/Trace: Dual41.pcx

Figure 2 - 12.The Display Setup Menu.

The NonRoute MenuDisplay Setup/Trace: Dual

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 25User Manual

Page 128: E-MANUAL

Trace:Dual fields are:

Screen 1 - The upper display in Trace:Dual. The pri-mary display, normally a magnitude spectrum, shouldbe selected for screen 1.

• Select Magnitude (spectrum), Time (time do-main waveform), or Phase (spectrum) with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Screen 2).

Screen 2 - The lower display in Trace:Dual. PressMENU to view the choices.

¾ See above information on selecting Mag-nitude, Time, or Phase.

¾ Refer to page 2 - 24 for description of Dis-play Setup/Trace:Dual fields:

Phase Type Cursor TypeX Axis Label

Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

Trigger type and trigger conditioning for shaft speed andphase measurements are set from this menu (Figure 2 -13).

> To access the Trigger Setup screen:• At the Dynamic menu, press 5 or move the

pointer bar to 5:Trigger Setup and press <EN-TER> (Figure 2 - 13).

The NonRoute MenuTrigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

2 - 26 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 129: E-MANUAL

49.pcx

Trigger Setup fields are:

Trigger Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

• With the pointer bar, select between Free Runfor inputs without a phase reference and Trig-ger when a separate synchronous referencepulse is available and to be used.

• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (TriggerSource).

Trigger Source - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select External when a phase reference triggeris available and connected to the input of the

Figure 2 - 13. The Trigger Setup Menu.

The NonRoute MenuTrigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 27User Manual

Page 130: E-MANUAL

Microlog. Input causes the Microlog to triggerfrom an input signal.

¾ Triggering from the input signal is typi-cally used to stabilize the time domain dis-play. It cannot be used for phase trendingor balancing.

• Select your choice of Trigger Source with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Input Trigger Slope).

Input Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select plus or minus with the pointer bar to de-termine whether the trigger occurs on a risingor descending signal.

• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Input TriggerLevel).

Input Trigger Level - Enter percent of full scale ampli-tude range (%FS) to eliminate noise which may causefalse triggering. The input trigger level will typicallyhave to be set above zero to prevent false triggeringwhenever an internal trigger is selected.

¾ This field is not active when TriggerSource:External has been selected.

• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Trigger Delay).

Trigger Delay - Trigger delay is used to view pre-triggeror post-trigger information. For the bump test, a

The NonRoute MenuTrigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

2 - 28 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 131: E-MANUAL

negative delay is used to have zero data prior to thebump excitation to minimize leakage errors. The de-lay is entered as a negative number of milliseconds(for example: —50ms)

• Enter number of milliseconds to offset the refer-ence pulse. The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Pulses/Rev).

¾ Enter a positive number for trigger delay,a negative number for a pre-trigger pulse.

Pulses/Rev - Enter number of tachometer or referencepulses per main shaft revolution (maximum eight dig-its including the decimal point). Defaults to 1 inUser Mode:Normal (see Utilities/Data Collection).The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Length/Rev).

Length/Rev - This function has not yet been implemented.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamicsetup selection menu.

Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

Establishes the type and characteristics of reference mark-ers which may be toggled on and off from the keypad.

> To access the Marker Setup screen:• At the Dynamic menu, press 6 or move the

pointer bar to 6:Marker Setup (Figure 2 - 14)and press <ENTER> .

The NonRoute MenuMarker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 29User Manual

Page 132: E-MANUAL

screen78.pcx

Marker Setup fields are:

Marker Type - Press MENU to view choices.

Harmonic - Sets a series of markers at integer multi-ples of the cursor position, or at the reference fre-quency.

Relative - Measures frequency from a marker posi-tion to the location of the cursor. Used to measurethe difference between two frequencies and/or twoamplitudes.

Sideband - Sets a series of equally spaced markerson either side of the cursor frequency, or on eitherside of the reference frequency.

¾ With MKRS OFF , F2 causes the cursorto jump to the next highest peak in the vi-

Figure 2 - 14.The Marker Setup Menu Options.

The NonRoute MenuMarker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

2 - 30 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 133: E-MANUAL

cinity of the cursor. With MKRS ON,F2 causes the cursor to jump to the nextmarker.

• Select your choice of Marker Type with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Marker Mode) .

Marker Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

In Marker Mode:Cursor Lock , the marker funda-mental is determined by setting the cursor on the de-sired peak and by turning on the markers.

In Marker Type:Relative, the cursor is then releasedso you can read its position of amplitude, frequency,or order relative to the fundamental.

In Marker Mode:Fixed Freq , the marker fundamen-tal is set to the reference frequency entered in thenext field, Reference Freq.

• Select your choice of Marker Mode with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Reference Freq).

Reference Frequency - Enter the marker reference fre-quency. The pointer bar advances to the next field onthe screen (Sideband Freq).

¾ This field is active only if you selectedMarker Mode:Fixed Freq.

Sideband Frequency - Enter the spacing of sidebandmarkers around the reference frequency and press< ENTER> .

The NonRoute MenuMarker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 31User Manual

Page 134: E-MANUAL

¾ This field is active only if you selectedMarker Mode:Fixed Freq.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamicsetup selection menu.

Collecting NonRoute Dynamic Data

Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe andrecord dynamic POINT data. On the Dynamic menu se-lect 1:Take Data.

¾ The alarm levels for alarm1 and alarm2 inNonRoute and Analyzer modes are set in-ternally by the Microlog to 40% and 70%of full scale.

The Microlog does not allow dynamic data to be collectedduring overload state. The Microlog reports input signalstoo large for the display with an OVERLOADED SIGNALbanner on the screen, and with the overload indicator(OV) in the center of the status line (top line) of the dis-play. If a signal overload is indicated, increase the fullscale amplitude range to prevent amplitude errors. Duringdata collection you may increase or decrease the full scaleamplitude range in the Dynamic Data Point or FFT dis-plays with the up and down arrow keys.

Depending on how you set Average Mode in SpectrumSetup, the FFT may continue to average beyond the cho-sen number of averages (Average Mode:Continuous), itmay stop averaging and freeze the display (AverageMode:Finite), or it may repeat the entire averaging proc-ess to the chosen number of averages (Average Mode:Re-peat).

With this flexibility, the Microlog may be used to view aninstantaneous time domain waveform or FFT in real time;

The NonRoute MenuCollecting NonRoute Dynamic Data

2 - 32 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 135: E-MANUAL

view an averaged spectrum as it is collected; collect, aver-age, and freeze a spectrum; or view a repeated spectrum.

The controllable cursor is moved right and left with theright and left arrow keys to display frequency, magnitude,phase, and order of any spectral component. Markers, de-fined on the Marker Setup menu, may be turned on andoff with the MKRS ON/OFF function key.

Using the Function Keys

The dedicated function keys are active and may be usedwhen desired. Each function key is listed below with a de-scription of its action. The name of each key is followedby a letter in parentheses. When a function key functionis activated, this letter displays to the right of center of thescreen’s status line (top line).

FREEZE ON/OFF (F) - Toggles the FFT between active(dynamic) and hold modes. FREEZE may be usedfor detailed analysis of a dynamic spectrum. Press-ing the FREEZE key a second time restarts the liveFFT. FREEZE is marked by the letter F above theFFT display.

MKRS ON/OFF (M) - Toggles the markers on and off.

Harmonic markers are used to rapidly locate integralorders in relation to their fundamental (1X).

Sideband markers allow you to determine modula-tion frequency about a vibration peak. Sidebandmarkers are useful, for example, in locating a dam-aged tooth in a gearbox.

Relative markers are useful in the time domain for re-lating time intervals between events.

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 33User Manual

Page 136: E-MANUAL

¾ The F2 function key is an important aidin using markers. When markers areOFF, it advances the cursor to the highestpeak in the vicinity of the cursor. Whenmarkers are ON, it advances the cursor tothe next marker. When MarkerType:Sideband is active, the F2 key ad-vances the cursor to the next sidebandmarker so amplitude and frequency read-ings relative to the reference frequencycan be read. When Marker Type:Rela-tive is active, pressing the F2 key returnsthe cursor to the reference frequency.

Marker Mode:Cursor LockWhen Marker Mode:Cursor Lock is active, the MarkerType functions are:

Marker Type:Harmonic - In this function, a seriesof small square (box) markers are displayed at eachintegral multiple of the cursor position: 2, 3, 4, etc.

> To use the Harmonic function:• Place the cursor at the frequency to be ana-

lyzed.

• Press the MKRS ON/OFF key to toggle thefunction ON.

• Press the right arrow and left arrow keys tomove the cursor.

¾ You can press the right arrow or left ar-row key several times before the cursormoves, but each time an arrow key ispressed some markers will move. Thisspecial use of the arrow keys, called mi-

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

2 - 34 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 137: E-MANUAL

cro-motion, enables you to exactly alignthe markers on the peaks.

SHIFT/right arrow or SHIFT/left arrow causes thecursor and its related markers to move right or left ina one FFT bin sequence. This saves you turningmarkers off, moving the cursor, and turning the mark-ers back on when you are checking more than one setof harmonics.

¾ SHIFT is locked ON when the symbol displays in the middle of the top line ofyour screen.

Marker Type:Sideband - This function helps yousee sidebands around a central frequency.

> To use the Sideband function:• Place the cursor at the frequency around which

sidebands are to be observed.

• Press MKRS ON/OFF to toggle the markerson.

• Press the right arrow or left arrow keys untilthe sideband array “boxes” are aligned on thepeaks observed in the display.

¾ The entire sideband array may be movedleft or right with the left arrow or rightarrow keys after pressing the SHIFT key.Toggle the SHIFT lock off if you want touse other keys in lower case.

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 35User Manual

Page 138: E-MANUAL

Marker Type:Relative - This function helps youmeasure the distance between two peaks.

> To use the Relative function:• Place the cursor at the desired beginning point

for the measurement.

• Press the MKRS ON/OFF key to toggle themarkers ON.

• Press the right arrow or left arrow keys toplace the cursor at the desired end point for themeasurement.

The difference between the marker and cursor dis-plays numerically directly above the graphic display.

Marker Mode:Fixed FreqWhen Marker Mode:Fixed Freq is active, the MarkerType functions are:

Marker Type:Harmonic - The marker displays on the ref-erence frequency and on all integral harmonics. Thecursor is free to move to any other spectral compo-nent so amplitude and frequency can be read.

Marker Type:Sideband - The main marker appears at thefrequency you specified and five sideband markersare spaced at the sideband frequency you specified.The cursor is free to move to any spectral component.

Marker Type:Relative - The main marker appears at thereference frequency. The cursor is free to move toany other spectral component so relative amplitudeand frequency can be read.

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

2 - 36 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 139: E-MANUAL

DISPLY EXPAND (D) - This function graphically ex-pands the contents of a time or frequency domain dis-play vertically and/or horizontally to use the fulldynamic range of the Microlog. It reveals charac-teristics which may be hidden by the display mode orby the resolution without changing data collection pa-rameters. To activate the DISPLY EXPAND func-tion, press its key on the keypad. The actualexpansion is accomplished by arrow keys.

¾ In a split screen display, DISPLY EX-PAND is active on the screen occupied bythe cursor. SHIFT CURSOR and DIS-PLY EXPAND can be used to selectivelyexpand one of the two screens displayed.

SAVE

> To assign an ID to a dynamic data display and store thedata:

• Press the SAVE key, a 20-character window dis-plays.

• Enter the ID or IDs in the window. • When the IDs have been specified, press

< ENTER> to store the display.

ZOOM IN (Z): Zooms in on the FFT spectrum in the fre-quency domain (time domain displays are not affectedby ZOOM ) to provide more frequency resolution be-tween lines. The Microlog takes the frequency at thecursor position and progressively divides the fre-quency range by half each time you press the ZOOMIN key. The lines resolution across the zoomed fre-quency range remains approximately constant.

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 37User Manual

Page 140: E-MANUAL

Example: Suppose the current frequency range isfrom 0 to 60000 CPM with 400 lines resolution andthe cursor is at 12000 CPM.

When you press ZOOM IN , the new frequency rangeis 30000 CPM with 400 lines resolution and the cur-sor will still be at 12000 CPM.

Press ZOOM IN again to produce a new frequencyrange of 15000 CPM with the cursor still at 12000CPM.

¾ Although the Microlog displays only aportion of the increased resolution spec-trum in ZOOM , the full frequency rangeis available at the same resolution in thesegment being displayed and can be exam-ined (panned) by moving the cursor be-yond the end of the visible frequencyrange with the left arrow or right arrowkeys. Panning moves the viewing windowto the right or left of the frequency range.

ZOOM OUT: Reverses ZOOM IN .

RESET MEASMT - Resets the FFT average to zero andrestarts the averaging. This is especially useful ifsomething happens during the FFT averaging processto invalidate the measurement, such as losing contactwith the probe. You may also reset when you wish torepeat a measurement for any reason.

1XRPM - Sets the frequency at the cursor position to themachine running speed, and uses the value as the in-dex for the order display.

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

2 - 38 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 141: E-MANUAL

> To use the 1XRPM function:• Move the spectrum cursor to the spectral compo-

nent (peak) you have identified as running fre-quency.

• Press the 1XRPM key. The order displayed ona line above the FFT reads 1.0 or close to 1.0.

As the cursor is moved across the spectrum, the or-der displayed indicates the order value relative to therunning frequency set with 1XRPM.

¾ The Microlog interpolates between adja-cent spectral lines to arrive at an accuratevalue of running frequency. Since ordersare calculated to the center of spectrallines, they may be displayed as 1.01,2.05, etc.

F1/F2 -

F1 - toggles between displaying the value at the cur-sor and displaying the overall value.

F2 -MKRS OFF - causes the cursor to jumpto the highest peak in the vicinity of thecursor.MKRS ON - causes the cursor to jump tothe next marker.

SHIFT CURSOR - When the dual screen option is cho-sen in the Trace field (in Display Setup), this keytoggles the cursor between the two screens.

¾ In a dual screen display, Function Keysact on the screen with the cursor.

The NonRoute MenuUsing the Function Keys

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 39User Manual

Page 142: E-MANUAL

LIN/LOG (L) - Toggles the spectrum display between lin-ear and logarithmic amplitude scales. LOG enablesviewing very low level spectral components on thedisplay. The normal or default condition is set toLIN.

¾ In Log mode, the amplitude of the cursordisplayed above the graph reads in linearamplitude (such as Gs or IPS) althoughthe vertical axis of the graph is scaled indB.

PGUP - During data collection, press PGUP to doublethe maximum frequency.

PGDN - During data collection, press PGDN to cut themaximum frequency in half.

Process Measurements

> To set up for taking process measurements:• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer

bar to 2:NonRoute and press <ENTER> .The screen of Figure 2 - 3 displays.

• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Processand press <ENTER> . The screen of Figure 2- 15 displays.

The NonRoute MenuProcess Measurements

2 - 40 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 143: E-MANUAL

56.pcx

• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:InputSetup and press <ENTER> . The screen ofFigure 2 - 16 displays.

Figure 2 - 15. The Process Menu.

The NonRoute MenuProcess Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 41User Manual

Page 144: E-MANUAL

57.pcx

Process Input screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe equipment and the exact locationwhere a measurement is to be recorded.

DESC - Enter up to 32 characters and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield on the screen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - Enter the highest anticipated value of themeasurement and press < ENTER> . The pointerbar advances to the next field on the screen (Engi-neering Units for Full Scale).

Figure 2 - 16. The Process Input Screen.

The NonRoute MenuProcess Measurements

2 - 42 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 145: E-MANUAL

• Enter your choice of Engineering Units andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Input Sens).

Input Sens(itivity) - Enter millivolts (mv) per engineeringunit (EU) for inputs from a directly connected pickupsuch as an infrared temperature sensor. Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield on the screen (Input Offset).

¾ Entering a zero (0) for Input Sens indi-cates the input is to be a manual entry.

Input Offset - Required when measuring a value from a 4-20 mA current loop.

• Enter a value in millivolts to offset the zeropoint of the measurement and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thetop of the menu.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Processmenu.

Collecting NonRoute Process Data

Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe andrecord process POINT data. Process data can be inputwith any DC device, such as a temperature probe con-nected to your Microlog, or it can be manually enteredfrom an observed reading.

> To access the Take Data screen:• On the Process menu, select 1:Take Data. The

screen of Figure 2 - 17 displays.

The NonRoute MenuCollecting NonRoute Process Data

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 43User Manual

Page 146: E-MANUAL

60.pcx

• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-ing (if you are connected to a dc device) or tomanually enter data (if you are observing it).

• Press < ENTER> to save the current measure-ment.

> To access the Options menu:• Press MENU to display the Options menu. If

you are connected to a DC device, the Optionsmenu displays.

Options are:

1:Make Reading 2:Manual Read3:Coded Notes 4:User Note

Figure 2 - 17.The Process Data Collection Screen.

The NonRoute MenuCollecting NonRoute Process Data

2 - 44 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 147: E-MANUAL

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 10 and 1 - 11 for de-scription of the above Options Menuchoices.

HFD Measurements

> To set up for taking HFD measurements:• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer

bar to 2:NonRoute and press < ENTER> .The screen of Figure 2 - 3 displays.

• Press 3 or move the pointer bar to 3:HFD andpress < ENTER> . A screen similar to Figure2 - 15 displays.

• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:InputSetup and press <ENTER> . The screen ofFigure 2 - 18 displays.

scns3-34.pcx

Figure 2 - 18.The HFD Input Menu.

The NonRoute MenuHFD Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 45User Manual

Page 148: E-MANUAL

HFD Input Setup fields are:

¾ Refer to page 2 - 42 for descriptions ofthe ID and DESC fields.

Full Scale - Enter the highest anticipated value of themeasurement in Gs and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on the screen(Input Sens).

Input Sens(itivity) - Enter millivolts (mv) per engineeringunit (EU) sensitivity of the accelerometer and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield on the screen (Detection).

¾ Entering a zero (0) for Input Sens indi-cates the input is to be a manual entry.

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Use the arrow keys to select Peak or RMS andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the top of the menu.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the HFD menu.

Collecting NonRoute HFD Data

High Frequency Detection (HFD) measurements, whichprovides a measure of early warning of bearing failure.Measuring in the 5 kHz to 60 kHz range, HFD detects themetal-to-metal contact which occurs when lubrication isnot sufficient or not able to do its job. Use a standard ac-celerometer to collect HFD data.

Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe andrecord HFD data.

The NonRoute MenuCollecting NonRoute HFD Data

2 - 46 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 149: E-MANUAL

> To observe and record HFD data:• On the HFD menu, select 1:Take Data. A

screen similar to Figure 2 - 17 displays.

• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-ing or to manually enter data (if you are observ-ing it).

• Press < ENTER> to save the current measure-ment. Press MENU to display the Optionsmenu. If you are recording data manually, theOptions menu displays.

Options are:

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 10 and 1 - 11 for de-scriptions of Options menu choices:

1:Make Reading 2:Manual Read3:Coded Notes 4:User Note

4:Make Reading - This selection re-takes the reading andoverwrites the previous reading.

Running Speed Measurements

> To measure the 1XRPM of a machine:• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer

bar to 2:NonRoute and press <ENTER> . The screen of Figure 2 - 3 displays.

• Press 4 or move the pointer bar to 4:RunningSpeed and press <ENTER> . A screen simi-lar to Figure 2 - 15 displays.

• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:InputSetup and press <ENTER> . The screen ofFigure 2 - 19 displays.

The NonRoute MenuRunning Speed Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 47User Manual

Page 150: E-MANUAL

67.pcx

Input Setup fields are:

¾ Refer to page 2 - 42 for descriptions ofthe ID, DESC, and Full Scale fields.

Pulses/Rev - Enter number of tachometer pulses per revo-lution and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next choice on the menu (Length/Rev).

¾ The Microlog divides the tachometerpulse rate by pulses/rev so the measure-ment is equal to the running speed of themachine (1XRPM).

Length/Rev - This function has not yet been implemented.• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Running

Speed menu.

Figure 2 - 19.The Speed Input Screen.

The NonRoute MenuRunning Speed Measurements

2 - 48 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 151: E-MANUAL

• Press < ESCAPE> once more to return to theNonRoute menu.

Collecting NonRoute Running Speed Data

To collect running speed data, you must have a tachometerconnected to your Microlog for external trigger input.Running speed may be collected with a direct tachometerinput or by observing a reading and entering the datamanually.

Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe andrecord running speed.

> To observe and record running speed data:• On the Running Speed menu, press 1 or move

the pointer bar to 1:Take Data and press < ENTER> . A screen similar to Figure 2 -17 displays.

• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-ing.

¾ If a tach input is not present, data is notcollected and the Microlog’s screen dis-plays the message NO TACH.

> To collect data manually:• Press MENU to display options.

The NonRoute MenuCollecting NonRoute Running Speed Data

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 49User Manual

Page 152: E-MANUAL

Options are:

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 10 and 1 - 11 for de-scriptions of Options menu choices:

1:Make Reading 2:Manual Read3:Coded Notes 4:User Note.

• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:ManualRead and press <ENTER> .

• Press <ENTER> to start recording the read-ing.

• Press < ENTER> to save the current speed.

The NonRoute MenuCollecting NonRoute Running Speed Data

2 - 50 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 153: E-MANUAL

3/6/92 10:40 S.G.

3The Transfer Menu

There are two ways to transfer data between the PRISMhost software on your host computer and your CMVA60Microlog data collector:

• Via a direct, hard-wired connection between theMicrolog and host computer.

• Via modems between the Microlog and an at-tended host computer.

Setting the Communication Mode Parameters

> To set up the Communication mode parameters:• Set the PRISM host software communication

mode parameters through the PRISM host soft-ware Control Panel screen.

¾ Refer to your PRISM host software’s UserManual for detailed instructions.

• Connect your Microlog to its host computerthrough a modem, or directly connected as illus-trated in Figure 3 - 1.

• Turn on the Microlog. • Follow the setup instructions in the section

headed Communications in Chapter 8, Utili-ties.

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 1User Manual

Page 154: E-MANUAL

dani.sld

¾ Communication parameters must be thesame in both the Microlog and host com-puter.

Data Transfer

Transfer data using one of the following combinations setup in the Microlog:

Modem Mode:None - For a direct, hard-wired connec-tion between the Microlog and host computer.

Modem Mode:Originate - Works in a like manner to thehard-wired situation; however, the Microlog can beoperating at a distance from the host computer overtelephone lines. The Microlog “dials” the call andthe PRISM host software automatically answers. Thehost computer must be attended by an operator.

support module

host computer Microlog

data collector

Figure 3 - 1. The Microlog/PRISM System.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer

3 - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 155: E-MANUAL

Modem Mode:Auto Answer - To make the connection,the PRISM host software originates the call and theMicrolog automatically answers.

Data Transfer - Download

Modem Mode:NoneThis mode is used with your PRISM host software for a di-rect, hard-wired connection between the Microlog andhost computer.

> To download directly from the host computer to the Microlog:

• From the Main menu, press 3 or move thepointer bar to 3:Transfer and press <EN-TER> . The Transfer menu screen (Figure 3 -2) appears and the Microlog is ready to commu-nicate with its host.

ch8-02.pcx

Figure 3 - 2. The Microlog Transfer Screen.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer - Download

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 3User Manual

Page 156: E-MANUAL

¾ If the host cannot establish communica-tions, verify that communications parame-ters are identical for both host and theMicrolog. Refer to the section headedCommunications in Chapter 8, Utilitiesand your PRISM host software’s UserManual for details.

You may verify Communications settings in the Micrologby pressing MENU at the screen of Figure 3 - 2. A trans-fer communications screen displays (Figure 3 - 3). Seethe Communications section in Chapter 8, Utilities, forusing this screen.

1002.pcx

As data transfer proceeds, the status on the Transferscreen changes in response to information transferredto/from the host. The number of SETs and POINTs trans-

Figure 3 - 3.The Microlog Communications Screen.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer - Download

3 - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 157: E-MANUAL

ferred are reported on the Microlog screen along with thenumber of messages, overalls, and spectra (Figure 3 - 4).

1003.pcx

The Microlog stores the downloaded POINTs and SETsfor data collection. Figure 3 - 5 shows a ROUTE displayon the Microlog screen for the downloaded SETs andPOINTs.

Figure 3 - 4. The Transfer Screen Report.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer - Download

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 5User Manual

Page 158: E-MANUAL

601.pcx

Modem Mode:OriginateThis procedure works in a like manner to the hard-wiredsetup; however, the Microlog can be operating at a dis-tance from the host computer over telephone lines.

If Microlog/Transfer is selected in the PRISM host soft-ware, with Modem Mode:Auto Answer selected in thePRISM host software’s Control Panel (that is, answermode via modem), a Microlog operator may set the Microlog to Modem Mode:Originate (that is, “dial-up”mode via modem) and access Transfer on the Micrologmain menu. The Microlog dials the modem phone num-ber. Connection is made, and the operator at the host com-puter may upload or download as if in hard-wired mode.

Figure 3 - 5. The Downloaded SETs and POINTs.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer - Download

3 - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 159: E-MANUAL

Modem Mode:Auto AnswerThis procedure works in a like manner to the hard-wiredsituation; however, the Microlog can be operating at a dis-tance from the host computer over telephone lines.

If Microlog/Transfer is selected in the PRISM host soft-ware on the host computer with Modem Mode:Originateselected in the PRISM host software’s Control Panel (thatis, “dial-up” mode via modem), the Microlog operatormust set the Microlog to Modem Mode:Auto Answer(that is, answer mode via modem) and access Transfer inthe Microlog main menu. The PRISM host software dialsthe modem phone number. Connection is made, and theoperator at the host computer may upload or download asif in hard-wired mode.

Data Transfer - Upload

> To upload from the Microlog to the host computer:• From the Microlog’s Main menu, press 3 or

move the pointer bar to 3:Transfer and press< ENTER> . The Transfer menu (Figure 3 -6) appears and the Microlog is ready to commu-nicate with its host.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer - Upload

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 7User Manual

Page 160: E-MANUAL

ch8-02.pcx

¾ If the host cannot establish communica-tions, verify that communications parame-ters are identical in the host and theMicrolog. Refer to the section headedCommunications in Chapter 8, Utilitiesand your PRISM host software’s UserManual for details.

If you select The Entire SKF Microlog, all POINTs inthe Microlog uploads their data to the PRISM host soft-ware in the host computer. If you select From the Desig-nated SET, the Microlog uploads only data for thosePOINTs in the one SET highlighted by the upper right-hand window’s pointer bar.

Figure 3 - 6. The Microlog Transfer Screen.

The Transfer MenuData Transfer - Upload

3 - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 161: E-MANUAL

3-4-92 6:20 S.G.

4The Applications Menu

Applications menu options provide easy set up and datacollection screens for monitoring and adjusting specificmachinery applications. Applications menu options are:

Balancing (Basic)Balancing (Advanced)Tracking FilterCyclic AnalysisCurrent AnalysisBump TestRun Up/Coast DownConfiguration Wizard

> To access Applications menu options:• At the Main menu, press 4, or move the pointer

bar to 4:Applications and press <ENTER> .The Applications menu displays (Figure 4 - 1).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 1User Manual change 01

Page 162: E-MANUAL

app-1.pcx

Balancing (Basic)

The basic balancing wizard is designed as a learning aid tohelp guide the first time user through basic balancing se-quences.

> To access the Balancing (Basic) menu options:• From the Applications menu, press 1 or move

the pointer bar to 1:Balancing (Basic) andpress <ENTER> . The Balancing (Basic)menu displays (Figure 4 - 2).

Figure 4 - 1. The Applications Menu.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 2 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 163: E-MANUAL

bg-balmn.w mf

¾ It is recommended to always start with thefirst selection, Select Balance Job.

• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Select Bal-ance Job (if it is not already there) and press< ENTER> . A list box containing NEWBALANCE JOB (always the first item on thelist) and any previously saved jobs displays (Fig-ure 4 - 3). If a job already exists in RAM, theuser is prompted to either exit, select a new job(via the list box), or go with the current job inRAM (re-balance).

Figure 4 - 2. The Balancing (Basic) Menu.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 3User Manual change 01

Page 164: E-MANUAL

baljob.w mf

• Select NEW BALANCE JOB , then press< ENTER> , the Balance Setup screen dis-plays (Figure 4 - 4).

¾ If a previously saved job is selected, theapplication guides the user to a re-balanc-ing operation consisting of trim run(s).

Figure 4 - 3. The Balance Jobs List.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 4 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 165: E-MANUAL

bb-2.pcx

Balance Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 16 characters to uniquely identify this joband press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advances tothe next field on the screen (Type).

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity),displacement, or volts), which depends upon the typeof seismic sensor used (accelerometer, velocitypickup, or proximity probe), is required to establishintegration requirements for the FFT calculation.Press MENU to view the choices.

¾ Although provided as options, SEE andEnveloping are not applicable to balanc-ing operations as they are non-synchro-nous.

Figure 4 - 4. The Balance Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 5User Manual change 01

Page 166: E-MANUAL

• Select your choice for Type of measurementwith the pointer bar and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Input ).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) perEngineering Unit (EU) and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on the screen(Units for Weights).

Units for Weights - Press MENU to view choices.• Select from the three choices (OZ, LBS,

GRMS)and press <ENTER> .

• Press <ESCAPE> . The Reference RunSetup screen displays (Figure 4 - 5).

bb-4.pcx

• Carefully read the information displayed on theReference Run Setup screen and press <EN-TER> to continue. The Reference Run Data

Figure 4 - 5. The Reference Run Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 6 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 167: E-MANUAL

collection screen displays and data collection be-gins. (Figure 4 - 6).

d25.pcx

• When data collection is complete, press <EN-TER> to save the collected data. The TrialWeight Estimate screen displays (Figure 4 - 7).

Figure 4 - 6. The Reference Run Data Collection Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 7User Manual change 01

Page 168: E-MANUAL

bb-6.pcx

Read the Trial Weight Estimate screen carefully. Thisscreen describes trail weight procedures and criteria.

• Press <ENTER> , the Trial Weight Setupscreen displays (Figure 4 - 8).

Figure 4 - 7. The Trial Weight Estimate Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 8 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 169: E-MANUAL

bb-7.pcx

Trial Weight Setup fields are:

Plane 1/Weight - Enter the size of weight (magnitude)computed by the Microlog in its Estimate TrialWeight Calculation (or chosen by you) and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield (Plane 1/Angle).

Plane 1/Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight willbe attached and press <ENTER> .

• Press <ESCAPE> to continue, the InstallingTrial Weights screen displays (Figure 4 - 9).

Figure 4 - 8. The Trial Weight Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 9User Manual change 01

Page 170: E-MANUAL

bb-8.pcx

Read the Installing Trial Weights screen and press <EN-TER> to continue with Trial Run data collection. TheTrial Weights data collection screen displays (same as Fig-ure 4 - 6).

• Press <ENTER> to save data and the Correc-tion Weight screen displays (Figure 4 - 10).

Figure 4 - 9. The Installing Trial Weights Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 10 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 171: E-MANUAL

bb-10.pcx

• Read the displayed information carefully. Press< ENTER> , the Correction Weight Place-ment screen displays (Figure 4 - 11).

Figure 4 - 10. The Correction Weights Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 11User Manual change 01

Page 172: E-MANUAL

bb-11.pcx

Based on data collected in the reference run(s) and trialrun(s), suggested initial correction weights and placementangles are computed and displayed. These are the initialvalues used to correct the imbalance.

¾ Sometimes, a weight cannot convenientlybe placed at the angle recommended bybalancing computations. If this is thecase, press F1 to display the SplittingOne Weight Into Two Setup screen andthe Microlog performs the necessary cal-culations.

• Press <ENTER> to continue, the InstallingTrim Weights screen displays (Figure 4 - 12).

Figure 4 - 11. The Correction Weight Placement Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 12 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 173: E-MANUAL

bb-12.pcx

• Press <ENTER> to begin trim run data col-lection. The Trim Run data collection screendisplays (same as Figure 4 - 6).

• When data collection is complete, press <EN-TER> to save the data and the Trim Run com-pleted screen displays (Figure 4 - 13).

bb-14.pcx

Figure 4 - 12. The Installing Trim Weights Screen.

Figure 4 - 13. The Trim Run Complete Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 13User Manual change 01

Page 174: E-MANUAL

¾ If further trimming is required, use theTrim Weight(s) information displayedand press <ENTER> to retrim.

¾ If a weight cannot conveniently be placedat the angle recommended, press F1 tosplit the weight.

• If Trim Run data is acceptable, press <ES-CAPE> to return to the Balancing (Basic)menu.

• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 3 ormove the pointer bar to 3:Save Balance Job andpress <ENTER> to save the job.

> To view a completed balance job’s data:• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 2 or

move the pointer bar to 2:View Run Data andpress <ENTER> . The View Run Data screendisplays (Figure 4 - 14).

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

4 - 14 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 175: E-MANUAL

v-r-d.w mf

¾ All data displayed is for the currentlyloaded job, whether it is the completionof a new balance job, or a previouslysaved job that has just been loaded.

The Reference Run section displays speed, magnitude andphase data taken during the reference run.

In the Trial Run section, the speed, magnitude and phasedata are the result of using trial weights (not shown). Theweight and angle component of the Trial Run is the initialor correction weight data resulting from the trial run.

In the Trim Run section, the speed, magnitude and phasedata is the result of applying the weight and angle compo-nents in the trim run.

Figure 4 - 14. The View Run Data Screen.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Basic)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 15User Manual change 01

Page 176: E-MANUAL

> To save a balance job:• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 3 or

move the pointer bar to 3:Save Balance Job andpress <ENTER> . The current balancing jobis saved to permanent memory.

> To print a balance job report:• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 4 or

move the pointer bar to 4:Report and press< ENTER> . The current balance job isprinted to the printer selected in the Reportsmenu.

> To clear a balance job from temporary memory:• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 5 or

move the pointer bar to 5:Clear Job and press< ENTER> . The current balance job iscleared from temporary memory (RAM).

Basic Balancing Tips

• The basic balancing setup limits the user to fourbasic balancing configuration settings. This lim-ited choice selection focuses on the basics and isdesigned to prevent the beginning user from be-ing confused or intimidated by menu selections.

• After running a trial run using a trial weight,the CMVA60 automatically checks to see if the30-30 rule was passed. If it did not pass, theuser has the option of re-trying the trial runwith a different trial weight/angle, exiting, orcontinuing to the trim run operation. (30-30 rule- trial weights applied to an estimated balanceplane position must produce at least a 30%change in amplitude or 30o change in phasefrom the initial data.)

The Applications MenuBasic Balancing Tips

4 - 16 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 177: E-MANUAL

• More than one trim run can be executed to fur-ther "fine-tune" the trim adjustment. Word ofcaution: there is a limit as to how fine a tuningcan be conducted. There will be a point whereany further trim weights added will not improvethe balancing or can actually make it worse.

• After completing a balancing job and returningto the Balancing(Basic) menu, the job shouldbe saved. By saving a job, it can be retrieved ata later time for re-balancing or reporting.

• If the CMVA60 powers down in the middle of abalancing job, perform the following sequenceto return to where you left off:

1. Power up the unit.

2. Select Balancing (Basic).

3. Select Select Balance Job.

4. When prompted with "A previous job hasbeen detected in RAM" message, press <EN-TER> to return to the state you had left off.

Balancing (Advanced)

OverviewFollowing is an overview of steps performed in a “ typical”balancing procedure.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Advanced)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 17User Manual change 01

Page 178: E-MANUAL

¾ If rotor length to diameter ratio is lessthan .5 (L/D < .5), then single plane bal-ancing will probably reduce imbalance toacceptable levels. Overhung rotors arealso a special case in which single planemethods are used.

Refer to the Additional Balancing Notes section at theend of this Balancing (Advanced) section for a more de-tailed discussion of setup procedures and application guide-lines.

Single Plane BalancingThe balancing procedure in general is as follows:

Trigger

Machine balancing requires a shaft 1X signal eitherto the external trigger BNC input or to the phaseadapter connector. The trigger signal is normally ob-

tained from the ± TTL output of one of three triggers:

• converters• light sensitive or laser beam• reflective systems or the SKF StrobeLite

Balance Setup

Setup menu entries control all measurement parame-ters required for the balancing sequence. There is noneed to escape from this menu to any other menu toperform the measurement sequence setup.

Reference Run

At this point, the machine’s “ initial” measurement isstored.

The Tracking screen displays the running speed,which must be stable within 1 CPM to ensure goodphase data.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Advanced)

4 - 18 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 179: E-MANUAL

Trial Run/Trial Weight Estimate and Setup

The Trial Weight Estimate is based on the criteriathat the trial run centrifugal force does not exceed10% of the bearing shaft load. Trial weights are ap-plied to an estimated balance plane position and mustproduce at least a 30% change in amplitude or 30o

change in phase (30-30 rule) from the initial data.

Trial Run/Trial Weight/Trial Run 1

After trial weights have been installed, the machine isrun up to the same stable speed as with the initialreadings. Stable speeds are very important.

A warning displays if the 30-30 rule described aboveis not met.

Trial Run/Correction Weights

After both the initial and trial runs are completed, in-fluence coefficients are calculated, and are used to de-termine the Initial Correction Weight locations.

Trial Run/Correction Weights/Split Options

Often, either the correction weight must be split toconform to the balance weight hole pattern or otherweights in the balance holes must be combined.These options are available in the Utility Functionsmenu.

Trim Run/Trim Run

Once the trial weights have been removed (WeightsLeft in Forever:No) and the initial weight installed,trim run data is collected and stored.

Trim Run/Calculate Trim Weight

Influence coefficients that were calculated for the in-itial correction weight are used again to obtain thetrim weight.

The Applications MenuBalancing (Advanced)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 19User Manual change 01

Page 180: E-MANUAL

Save Balance Job

If desired, the current balancing job may be saved topermanent memory for later retrieval.

Report

A hard copy report of the balance data/Influence Co-efficients is produced when the printer adapter inter-faces the Microlog with either a laserjet or dot matrixprinter.

Two Plane BalancingIn two plane balancing, the measurement sequenceproceeds in the same order as single plane balancing,except two trial weights and two trial runs are re-quired to calculate the four influence coefficients(only 1 coefficient exists for single plane). Since theCMVA60 is a single channel instrument, the bearingmeasurements of plane A and B are performed sepa-rately.

Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

> To set up the Microlog’s Balancing (Advanced) options:• From the Applications menu, press 2, or move

the pointer bar to 2:Balancing (Advanced) andpress < ENTER> . The Balancing (ad-vanced) menu screen displays (Figure 4 - 15).

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

4 - 20 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 181: E-MANUAL

adv-bal1.pcx

• In the Balancing (advanced) menu screen,press 1, or move the pointer bar to 1:Select Bal-ance Job (if it is not already there) and press< ENTER> . The Balance Jobs list screen(Figure 4 - 16) displays from which you maycreate a NEW BALANCE JOB or select an ex-isting job.

Figure 4 - 15. The Balancing (advanced) Menu.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 21User Manual change 01

Page 182: E-MANUAL

baljob.w mf

¾ If NEW BALANCE JOB is selected, theBalance Setup screen automatically dis-plays. If an existing job is selected, thatjob is loaded into memory.

• Select NEW BALANCE JOB , the BalanceSetup screen displays (Figure 4 - 17).

¾ The Balance Setup menu can also be ac-cessed by selecting 2:Balance Setup fromthe Balancing (advanced) menu.

Figure 4 - 16. The Balance Jobs List Screen.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

4 - 22 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 183: E-MANUAL

baladvstup.w mf

Balance Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 16 characters to uniquely identify this joband press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances tothe next field (Type).

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity,displacement, or volts), which depends upon the typeof seismic sensor used (accelerometer, velocitypickup, or proximity probe), is required to establishintegration requirements for the FFT calculation.Press MENU to view the choices.

¾ Although provided as options, SEE andEnveloping are not applicable to balanc-ing operations as they are non-synchro-nous.

Figure 4-17. The Balance Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 23User Manual change 01

Page 184: E-MANUAL

• Select your choice for Type of measurementwith the pointer bar and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - The units for this field were automatically de-termined when you selected Type.

• Enter a numerical full scale value and press< ENTER> . (Note that this value may also bealtered, when in the spectrum display, with theup and down arrow keys.). The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (Detec-tion).

¾ If the number 0.0 is entered for the FullScale entry, autoranging and autoscalingresult.

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

The following table lists the Microlog’s method of sig-nal detection and scaling for overall dynamic measure-ments. Note that acceleration, velocity, anddisplacement values obtained from an accelerometeror velocity pickup are always scaled from RMS detec-tion. This replicates the measurement method usedwith most older instruments so newer Microlog re-corded values remain equivalent.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

4 - 24 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 185: E-MANUAL

DETECTION

INPUT OUTPUT Peak Pk to Pk RMS

Acceleration Acceleration Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Acceleration Velocity Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Acceleration Displacement Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Velocity Velocity Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Velocity Displacement Scaled fromRMS

Scaled fromRMS

TrueRMS

Displacement Displacement TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

Voltage Voltage TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

SEE SEE TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

ENV/ACC ENV/ACC TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

ENV/VEL ENV/VEL TruePeak

TruePk to Pk

TrueRMS

¾ Although provided as options, SEE andEnveloping are not applicable to balanc-ing operations as they are non-synchro-nous.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 25User Manual change 01

Page 186: E-MANUAL

• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS, or Pkto Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Input ).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) perEngineering Unit (EU) and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on the screen(Bandwidth).

Bandwidth - Press MENU to view the choices.

Narrow - 5xNormal - 10xWide - 20x

The Bandwidth option sets the tracking filter to a cut-off of 5, 10, or 20 orders, which translates to a 5%,10%, or 20% filter bandwidth around the 1X. A nar-row bandwidth can be used for trim balance when the1X amplitude is low and embedded in noise.

• Select your choice of Bandwidth with thepointer bar and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (AverageType).

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Average - The summation of the magnitude of eachspectral line is divided by the total number of aver-ages (ensemble averaging). This is the most fre-quently used method of averaging for routine datacollection and analysis.

Off - The same as setting the number of averages to1; the data is scaled by the selected method of detec-tion and will update at its maximum rate.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

4 - 26 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 187: E-MANUAL

Sync Time -Averaging in the time domain. Thismethod of averaging requires a reference trigger.When this method is selected, the spectrum producedand displayed is the FFT of the averaged synchronoustime domain samples.• Select one of the Average Type options with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Numberof Averages).

Number of Averages - Enter number of averages to be in-cluded in the measurement and press < ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field (TriggerSlope).

Trigger Slope - Select plus or minus with the pointer barto determine whether the trigger occurs on a rising ordescending signal.

• Press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Planes).

Planes - Press MENU to view the choices.

1 - A “one-plane” rotor.

2, separately - A “ two-plane” rotor. Two series ofmeasurements must be taken (one for each plane).

¾ With Displacement type selected, thescreen for 1 or 2 planes contains runoutentry fields for a second point (Point B).

• Select one of the Planes options with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Units forWeights).

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 27User Manual change 01

Page 188: E-MANUAL

Units for Weights - Press MENU to view the choices. • Select from the three choices with the pointer

bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (Weights Left In For-ever).

Weights Left In Forever - Press MENU to view thechoices.

Yes - All trial weights are permanently attached to therotor and never removed.

No - All trial weights are removed before attachingthe correct weight.• Select one of the Weights Left In Forever

options with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .

If Planes:2, separately is selected, an additional field dis-plays at the bottom of your screen and the pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (Static-Dynamic mode, Figure 4 -18).

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

4 - 28 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 189: E-MANUAL

add-field.w mf

Static-Dynamic mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

Select Yes to automatically calculate and display thestatic correction by combining the initial correctionweights. This mode also automatically calculates thecouple correction after the trim runs have been com-pleted. The couple correction component is calcu-lated by taking 1/2 the vector difference of plane oneand two corrections.

If Type:Displacement was selected, additional fields dis-play at the bottom of your screen and the pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (Runout Mag/Point A, Figure 4 -19).

Figure 4 - 18. The Static-Dynamic mode Field.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 29User Manual change 01

Page 190: E-MANUAL

dbch3-16.pcx

Runout Mag (Point A) - Enter runout magnitude (seeGlossary) for Point A and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (RunoutPhase/Point A).

¾ Runout magnitude and phase can be ob-tained as “slow roll” data with the Microlog.

With the Microlog, take slow roll data ata speed between 300 RPM and 500 RPM.Take this data during “coast down” afterthe unit has reached full operating tem-perature. This ensures that shaft expan-sions do not corrupt the runout signature. Since runout is a vector quantity, both am-plitude and phase values should be en-

Figure 4 - 19. The Runout Magnitude Field.

The Applications MenuSetting Balancing (Advanced) Options

4 - 30 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 191: E-MANUAL

tered. It is better to enter zeros for both,than to enter only a magnitude.

Runout Phase (Point A) - Enter runout phase for point Aand press < ENTER> .

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced(Planes:2, separately), the last two stepsshould be repeated for point B.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Balancing(advanced) menu.

This completes the Balance setup.

Reference Run

This data collection run is made with no weights on the ro-tor. The data collected is reference data.

Reference Run - Point A - This data collection run ismade with no weights on the rotor. Vibration data iscollected at Point A.

Reference Run - Point B - This data collection run ismade with no weights on the rotor. Vibration data iscollected at Point B.

> To perform a reference run:• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 3

or move the pointer bar to 3:Reference Runand press <ENTER> . The Reference Rundata collection screen displays (Figure 4 - 20)and the Microlog automatically takes the userthrough a single (or dual) plane reference run.

The Applications MenuReference Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 31User Manual change 01

Page 192: E-MANUAL

d25-2.w mf

Trial Run

This data collection run is made with the trial weight en-tered in the Trial Weight Setup menu.

> To set up and perform a trial run:• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 4

or move the pointer bar to 4:Trial Run andpress <ENTER> . The Trial Run menu dis-plays (Figure 4 - 21).

Figure 4 - 20.The Reference Run Data Collection Screen.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

4 - 32 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 193: E-MANUAL

t rlrun-mn.w mf

Estimate Trial Weight Setup

> To access the Estimate Trial Weight setup options:• From the Trial Run menu, press 1 or move the

pointer bar to 1:Estimate Trial Weight andpress <ENTER> The Setup screen displays(Figure 4 - 22).

Figure 4 - 21. The Trial Run Menu.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 33User Manual change 01

Page 194: E-MANUAL

dbch3-20.pcx

Fields in the Setup menu are:

Rotor Weight - Enter total rotor weight and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next field (Rotor Speed).

¾ You select speed (Hz or CPM) and engi-neering units (English or Metric) fromthe Microlog’s Utilities/Data Collectionmenu screen.

Rotor Speed - Enter the speed at which the rotor was running during the reference run and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next field (Rotor/Wt Radius).

Figure 4 - 22. The Setup Fields.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

4 - 34 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 195: E-MANUAL

Rotor/Wt Radius - Enter the distance from the center ofrotation to where the trial weight is to be attachedand press < ENTER> . • After configuring all Setup fields, press

< ESCAPE> , the Microlog computes an esti-mated trial weight to see in Trial Run #1 (Figure4 - 23).

dbch3-23.pcx

The trial weight is computed to produce a centrifugalforce, which is 10% of the static (at rest) weight of the ro-tor supported by the bearing.

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced(Planes: 2, separately), the estimatedweight shown is for plane 1. Anotherweight of equal value must be placed inplane 2 for Trial Run #2.

Figure 4 - 23. The Calculation Screen.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 35User Manual change 01

Page 196: E-MANUAL

¾ It is important to select an appropriatetrial weight. The trial weight should pro-duce a magnitude change of 30% and/or aphase angle change of at least 30 degrees.If the weight is too small, a balance run iswasted since no changes are seen. If thetrial weight is too large, it may damagethe machine, especially if it operatesabove critical speed.

Trial Weight Setup

> To access the Trial Weight Setup options:• From the Trial Run menu, press 2 or move the

pointer bar to 2:Trial Weight Setup and press< ENTER> . The Trial Weight Setup screendisplays (Figure 4 - 24).

dbch3-25.pcx

Figure 4-24. The Weight Field for Plane 1.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

4 - 36 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 197: E-MANUAL

Trial Weight Setup fields are:

Plane 1/Weight - Enter the size of weight (magnitude)computed by the Microlog in its Estimate TrialWeight Calculation (or chosen by you) and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield (Plane 1/Angle).

Plane 1/Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight willbe attached and press < ENTER> .

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced,(Planes: 2, separately), the last two stepsshould be repeated for plane 2 (Figure 4 -25).

dbch3-24.pcx

Figure 4 - 25.The Trial Weight Setup Screen for Planes:2, Separately.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 37User Manual change 01

Page 198: E-MANUAL

• Press <ESCAPE> to return to the Trial Runmenu.

Trial Run

Take TW1 Data - Point A - This data collection run ismade with the trial weight (entered in the TrialWeight Setup menu) attached at the point A end ofthe rotor (plane 1). Vibration data is collected atPoint A.

Take TW1 Data - Point B - This data collection run ismade with the trial weight (entered in the TrialWeight Setup menu) attached at the point A end ofthe rotor (plane 1). Vibration data is collected atPoint B.

Take TW2 Data - Point A - This data collection run ismade with the trial weight (entered in the TrialWeight Setup menu) attached at the point B end ofthe rotor (plane 2). Vibration data is collected atPoint A.

¾ If you selected Weights Left In For-ever:Yes, the trial weights from Trial Run1 will remain attached.

Take TW2 Data - Point B - This data collection run ismade with the trial weight (entered in the TrialWeight Setup menu) attached at the point B end ofthe rotor (plane 2). Vibration data is collected atPoint B.

Correction Weight• From the Trial Run menu, select Correction

Weight and press <ENTER> . The Correc-

The Applications MenuTrial Run

4 - 38 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 199: E-MANUAL

tion Weight Placement screen displays (Figure4 - 26).

dbch3-34.pcx

Based on the data collected in the reference run(s) andtrial run(s), suggested initial correction weights and place-ment angles are computed and displayed. These are the in-itial values used to correct the imbalance.

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced(Planes: 2, separately), the displayshows two sets of values for magnitudeand phase (Figure 4 - 27).

Figure 4 - 26.The Correction Weight Placement Screen.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 39User Manual change 01

Page 200: E-MANUAL

dbch3-33.pcx

Correction Weight Run

Take CW Data - Point A - This data collection run ismade with trial weight removed and correctionweights installed with the data collected on Point A.

Take CW Data - Point B - This data collection run ismade with trial weight removed and correctionweights installed with the data collected on Point B.

Splitting One Weight Into Two Sometimes, a weight cannot conveniently be placed at theangle recommended by balancing computations. This

Figure 4 - 27.The Correction Weight Placement

Screen for Two Plane Balancing.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

4 - 40 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 201: E-MANUAL

menu performs the necessary computation to allow you tosplit one weight into two weights.

Setup

> To split one weight into two:• In the Correction Weight Placement screen,

press F1 and press <ENTER> . The Setupscreen displays (Figure 4 - 28).

bscn2-54.pcx

Setup menu fields are:

Weight to Split - Enter the size of the weight which youwish to split into two weights and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next field (Weight Angle).

Figure 4 - 28. The Weight to Split Field.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 41User Manual change 01

Page 202: E-MANUAL

Weight Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight to besplit is now installed and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Split Wt 1 An-gle).

Split Wt 1 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish toinstall weight 1 and press < ENTER> . The pointerbar advances to the next field (Split Wt 2 Angle).

Split Wt 2 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish toinstall weight 2 and press < ENTER> . • When finished entering data, press

< ESCAPE> , the Microlog automatically cal-culates and displays the necessary weights andangles (Figure 4 - 29).

spl-cal.w mf

Figure 4 - 29.The Split Weight Calculation Screen.

The Applications MenuTrial Run

4 - 42 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 203: E-MANUAL

Trim Run

¾ The first step in conducting a trim run isto calculate the weight required for thetrim run. With the trim weight installed,a trim run can now be conducted.

> To conduct a trim data collection run:• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 5

or move the pointer bar to 5:Trim Run . TheTrim Run menu displays (Figure 4 - 30).

tmrn-mn.w mf

• Select 2:Take Data - Point A to collect trimrun data. The Trim Run Data Collection screendisplays (Figure 4 - 31).

Figure 4 - 30. The Trim Run Menu.

The Applications MenuTrim Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 43User Manual change 01

Page 204: E-MANUAL

D25-2a.pcx

¾ When you select Reference Run, TrialRun, or Trim Run , a screen similar toFigure 4 - 21 displays for all three runs.

• Press < ENTER> to save the collected data.

¾ If set to 2,Planes Separately, repeat theabove steps for Trim Run - Point B .

• To review and verify that the trim run data is ac-ceptable, select Display Trim Data. The TrimRun Data screen displays, (Figure 4 - 32).

Figure 4 - 31. The Trim Run Data Collection Screen.

The Applications MenuTrim Run

4 - 44 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 205: E-MANUAL

trun-dat.w mf

• Review the trim run data and if acceptable,press <ESCAPE> to return to the Trim Runmenu.

¾ If trim run is unacceptable, you may wishto save this data temporarily for referencepurposes and run the trim run again.

> To save this data:• Select Log Data option, the data is automat-

ically saved in temporary buffer.

The temporary log buffer has data storage space for 2runs. The first run data is saved on the top of the log(old), and the second (if any) is saved on the bottom(new).

Figure 4 - 32. The Trim Run Data Screen.

The Applications MenuTrim Run

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 45User Manual change 01

Page 206: E-MANUAL

> To rerun the trim run:• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Calculate

Trim Weight . The Trim Run Data screen dis-plays (Figure 4 - 33).

t rim-cal.w mf

Based on the data collected in the previous trim run(s),suggested initial correction weights and placement anglesare computed and displayed. These values are used to cor-rect the imbalance.

The Cumulative correction is the cumulative vector sumof the initial correction weight plus any subsequent trimweights.

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced(Planes: 2, separately), the displayshows two sets of values for magnitudeand phase.

Figure 4 - 33. The Trim Run Data Screen.

The Applications MenuTrim Run

4 - 46 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 207: E-MANUAL

¾ Refer to the Splitting One Weight IntoTwo section on pages 4 - 41 through 4 -42 for information concerning F1-SplitWeight.

The Review/Enter Data Screens

The purpose of the Review/Enter Data screen is to allowyou to view and/or change previously entered data.

> To access the Review/Enter Data screen:• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 6

or move the pointer bar to 6:Review/EnterData and press <ENTER> . The Review/En-ter Data menu displays (Figure 4 - 34).

revdatmn.w mf

Figure 4 - 34.The Review/Enter Data Screen.

The Applications MenuThe Review/Enter Data Screens

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 47User Manual change 01

Page 208: E-MANUAL

The data collected for each run may be reviewed andchanged if desired.

• Select the run (Reference Run, Trial Run, orTrim Run) you wish to review and press <EN-TER> , the screen in Figure 4 - 35 displays.

¾ The screens for a “one-plane” rotor(Planes: 1) contain only one trial run andone point (point A).

dbch3-31.pcx

Speed - View the speed collected in the Reference Run.Change it if desired and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Point A/Mag).

Figure 4 - 35.An Example Review/Enter Data Screen.

The Applications MenuThe Review/Enter Data Screens

4 - 48 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 209: E-MANUAL

¾ Magnitude units in the following screensare initialized to a default value. If theseunits appear to be incorrect for your inputsetup, take some data. After data collec-tion, the units are updated to the units youselected in the Input Setup screen.

Point A/Mag - View the magnitude collected in the Reference Run. Change it if desired and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield (Point A/Phase).

Point A/Phase - View the phase collected in the Reference Run. Change it if desired and press< ENTER> .

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced,(Planes: 2, separately), the last two stepsshould be repeated for point B.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Review/En-ter Data menu.

Correction WeightIf 2, Planes separately and Static-Dynamic Mode:Yes isselected, Initial and Trim Weight menu selections displaythe combined static and couple correction data (Figure 4-36).

The Applications MenuThe Review/Enter Data Screens

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 49User Manual change 01

Page 210: E-MANUAL

f ig4-36.pcx

View Run Data

> To view the run data information:• From the Review/Enter Data screen, press 6 or

move the pointer bar to 6:View Run Data andpress <ENTER> . The View Run Datascreen displays (Figure 4 - 37).

Figure 4 - 36.

The Applications MenuThe Review/Enter Data Screens

4 - 50 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 211: E-MANUAL

vrndata.w mf

¾ All data displayed is for the currentlyloaded job, whether it is the completionof a new balance job, or a previouslysaved job that has just been loaded.

The Reference Run section displays the speed, magnitudeand phase data taken during the reference run.

In the Trial Run section, the speed, magnitude and phasedata are the result of using trial weights (not shown). Theweight and angle component of the Trial Run is the initialor correction weight data resulting from the trial run.

In the Trim Run section, the speed, magnitude and phasedata is the result of applying the weight and angle compo-nents in the trim run.

Figure 4 - 37. The View Run Data Screen.

The Applications MenuThe Review/Enter Data Screens

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 51User Manual change 01

Page 212: E-MANUAL

The Influence Coeff Screen

> To enter previously recorded influence coefficients fora single plane rebalance:

• From the Review/Enter Data menu, press 7 ormove the pointer bar to 7:Influence Coeff andpress <ENTER> . The Review/Enter InfluCo screen displays (Figure 4 - 38).

ahh.pcx

In the case of single-plane balancing, only one influ-ence coefficient magnitude and one phase are entered.

Figure 4 - 38.The Review/Enter Influ Co Screen for a

Single-Plane Rebalance.

The Applications MenuThe Review/Enter Data Screens

4 - 52 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 213: E-MANUAL

> To enter previously recorded influence coefficients fora two plane rebalance:

• From the Review/Enter Data menu, press 7 ormove the pointer bar to 7:Influence Coeff andpress <ENTER> .

Dual-plane balancing uses four influence coefficients.

Save Balance Job

> To save your balance job:• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 7

or move the pointer bar to 7:Save Balance Job,the Microlog automatically saves your balancejob information.

The Utility Functions Menu

> To access the Balancing (advanced) menu Utility Func-tions screen:

• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 8or move the pointer bar to 8:Utility Functionsand press <ENTER> (Figure 4 - 39).

The Applications MenuSave Balance Job

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 53User Manual change 01

Page 214: E-MANUAL

bscn2-44.pcx

Combining Weights

After your balancing runs, you may want to combine yourinitial and trim weights into a single weight. This menuperforms the necessary computation to allow you to substi-tute one weight for the original two.

Setup

> To access the Combine Weights Setup screen:• From the Utility Functions menu, press 1 or

move the pointer bar to 1:Combine Weightsand press <ENTER> . The CombineWeights menu displays.

• In the Combine Weights menu, press 1 ormove the pointer bar to 1:Setup and press

Figure 4 - 39. The Utility Functions Menu.

The Applications MenuCombining Weights

4 - 54 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 215: E-MANUAL

< ENTER> . The Setup menu displays (Fig-ure 4 - 40).

bscn2-46.pcx

Setup menu fields are:

Weight 1/Weight - Enter the size of weight 1 and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield (Weight 1/Angle).

Weight 1/Angle - Enter the angle at which weight 1 wasattached to the rotor and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Weight2/Weight).

Weight 2/Weight - Enter the size of weight 2 and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the nextfield (Weight 2/Angle).

Figure 4 - 40. The Weight 1/Weight Field.

The Applications MenuCombining Weights

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 55User Manual change 01

Page 216: E-MANUAL

Weight 2/Angle - Enter the angle at which weight 2 wasattached to the rotor and press < ENTER> .

• When finished entering data, press < ESCAPE> to return to the CombineWeights menu.

Calculations• From the Combine Weights menu, press 2 or

move the pointer bar to 2:Calculation and press< ENTER> . After a moment of computation,the Microlog displays the combined weight andangle. The Calculation screen displays (Figure4 - 41).

calcul.pcx

Figure 4 - 41. The Calculation Screen.

The Applications MenuCombining Weights

4 - 56 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 217: E-MANUAL

Splitting One Weight Into Two

Sometimes, a weight cannot conveniently be placed at theangle recommended by balancing computations. Thismenu does the necessary computation to allow you to splitone weight into two weights.

Setup

> To split one weight into two:• In the Utility Functions screen, press 2 or

move the pointer bar to 2:Split Weight and press< ENTER> . The Split Weight menu displays.

• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Setup andpress <ENTER> . The Setup screen displays(Figure 4 - 42).

bscn2-59.pcx

Figure 4 - 42. The Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuSplitting One Weight Into Two

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 57User Manual change 01

Page 218: E-MANUAL

Setup menu fields are:

Weight to Split - Enter the size of the weight which youwish to split into two weights and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next field (Weight Angle).

Weight Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight to besplit is now installed and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Split Wt 1 An-gle).

Split Wt 1 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish toinstall weight 1 and press < ENTER> . The pointerbar advances to the next field (Split Wt 2 Angle).

Split Wt 2 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish toinstall weight 2 and press < ENTER> .

When finished entering data, press < ESCAPE> to returnto the Split Weight menu.

Calculations• From the Split Weight menu, press 2 or move

the pointer bar to 2:Calculation and press< ENTER> . After computation, the Micrologdisplays the necessary weights and angles. TheCalculation screen displays (Figure 4 - 43).

The Applications MenuSplitting One Weight Into Two

4 - 58 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 219: E-MANUAL

splwg-cal.pcx

Balance Job Reports

If you wish to save the results of your balancing run, youmay output your results to a printer. Refer to Chapter 7,Reports for further information on printer connectionsand on which printers are compatible with your Microlog.

A balance report makes a record of the steps you per-formed during balancing. It records trial weights, runoutvalues, reference run data, trial run data, influence coeffi-cients (single-channel Microlog only), and initial and trimcorrection weights.

The report is accessed from the Balancing (advanced)menu.

• From the Utility Functions menu, press 3 ormove the pointer bar to 3:Report and press< ENTER> .

Figure 4 - 43. The Calculation Screen.

The Applications MenuBalance Job Reports

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 59User Manual change 01

Page 220: E-MANUAL

The layout for a “ two plane” Microlog balance report isshown below (Figure 4 - 44).

bscn3-49.pcx

Figure 4 - 44.A Two Plane Balance Report.

The Applications MenuBalance Job Reports

4 - 60 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 221: E-MANUAL

Clearing the Current Job From Temporary Memory(RAM)

> To clear the current job from memory:• From the Utility Functions menu, press 4 or

move the pointer bar to 4:Clear Job and press< ENTER> .

Clear Job - This selection clears all run data from the Mi-crolog’s memory to prepare for balancing a rotor.When data has been cleared, the pointer bar returnsto the Utility Functions menu.

Reset Setup

Reset Setup - This selection resets the current balancingsetup configuration back to default.

Delete Job

Delete Job - This selection deletes the current job bothfrom RAM and permanent memory. When selected,this option displays a message prompting for verifica-tion of the deletion.

Advanced Balancing Tips

• When conducting identical balancing jobs, loada previously saved, identical job, then go to Bal-ance Setup and change the balance setup "ID:".When saved, is saved as a separate balancingjob under the new ID.

• Prior to balancing, ensure that the CMVA60date/time is set correctly. This data is saved

The Applications MenuClearing the Current Job From Temporary Memory (RAM)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 61User Manual change 01

Page 222: E-MANUAL

with each job, and can be retrieved and dis-played/printed at a later time with the job.

• If the Operator ID option is enabled and down-loaded from PRISM (v1.30 or later), enablingthe operator ID option in the CMVA60(Main/Utilities/Route Setup/Operator ID Tag-ging) tags each balancing job with the operatorID. When enabled, the ID can be displayed byselecting Balancing (Advanced)/Review/EnterData/View Data, and printed on reports.

Balance Setup

In the Balance Setup, normal analyzer input optionsare available, such as Type, Full Scale, Detection,and Sensitivity.

The Microlog is set to the tracking mode, which de-faults to Order analysis, 100 lines of resolution, Ex-ternal trigger, External trigger source, Uniformwindow and 10 orders for normal bandwidth. Ifwide or narrow bandwidth is selected, then 20X or10X orders is set up. These orders essentially reflectas 20%, 10%, or 5% bandwidth about the 1X FFTcomponent. The narrow bandwidth is useful for en-hancing the signal to noise ratio, when the trim runsignals are imbedded in noise.

Average Type

Should be set to Average:Off or Average:SyncTime. If phase readings vary, even though the run-ning speed is stable within tenths of CPM, then Aver-age:Average or Average:Sync Time should beselected.

¾ Sync Time averaging is most advanta-geous when nearby machines are runningat nearly the same speed, and producing

The Applications MenuAdvanced Balancing Tips

4 - 62 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 223: E-MANUAL

crosstalk. These non-coherent crosstalkcomponents tend to a zero average usingsynchronous time averaging.

Shaft Trigger

The trigger input to the CMVA60 can be appliedeither to the Microlog’s BNC trigger input, or thephase adapter/multi-pin connector. The phase adapt-er is used with the light sensing, laser beam, or SKFStrobeLite systems. The outputs from these devicesare TTL levels.

SKF StrobeLite

This unit connects to the phase adapter with a cablethat takes the accelerometer signal for lock and trackoperation, sending back a TTL trigger signal to theMicrolog digital interrupt controls.

The StrobeLite is functionally set up by these sequen-tial steps:

• The StrobeLite is adjusted by the internal gener-ator until the flash is synchronized to reflect a1X stopped view of the reference shaft marking.

• When the shaft reflective reference is a stableview, the strobe control is switched to the track-ing position. At this time, it is important thatthe internal control knob remain in a locked po-sition without change. The knob not only con-trols the internal generator, but also controls abandpass filter to enhance the 1X accelerometercomponent.

• When the accelerometer tracks and locks theflash to a 1X synchronous display, the phase ad-justment is positioned such that the shaft markcoincides to a reference point on the bearingpedestal. This spatial reference point is used forall measurement runs; Initial , Trial , and Trim .

The Applications MenuAdvanced Balancing Tips

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 63User Manual change 01

Page 224: E-MANUAL

• Only when phase adjustment positions the flash-ing shaft marking to this spatial reference pointare the Take Data measurements valid.

• The StrobeLite’s slope must always be positivesince it is the positive slope that shifts with thephase adjustment.

Trim Run

The trim run is performed after the data from the In-itial Run and the Trial Run s are entered into the cal-culations for the Influence Coefficients. Once thesecoefficients have been computed, they can be used infuture balancing of these specific machines by manualentry in the Review/Enter Influence Coefficient win-dow.

¾ If the coefficients are manually entered,then all Take Data measurements thereaf-ter are trim runs.

Combine and Split Weights

These functions are useful when several weights mustbe positioned to prescribed balance points to beequivalent to the needed correction weight (SplitWght), or when several weights must be combined tobe equivalent to the specified correction weights.The Combined Weight function is also useful for cal-culating the sum or difference of Take Data measure-ments. It is well known that the vector sum of thetwo bearing measurements in two plane is static im-balance, while the difference is twice the couple im-balance.

The Combined Weight function computes twice thecouple by adding 180o to one measurement entry (dif-ference). It is only necessary to enter the two vectorsMag/Phase for the static (sum).

The Applications MenuAdvanced Balancing Tips

4 - 64 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 225: E-MANUAL

Runout or Slow Roll Vectors

The Eddy Probe transducer is used when PointType:Displacement is selected. A Runout field ap-pears in the Setup screen which modifies the meas-urement of each Take Data run. Eddy currenttransducers measure the shaft surface variations aswell as the high spot dynamics. The shaft surface im-perfections often add to this dynamic signal as distor-tions that affect measurement accuracy, especiallyduring balancing. The slow roll or runout vector cor-rection is performed at low speeds where imbalanceforces are negligible and the surface imperfectionsare the motor component contributions. Once theshaft is measured for runout, this data is vectoriallysubtracted from each data collection run.

Tracking Filter

The Tracking Filter application can be used as a balanc-ing tool. It produces a tabular display of magnitude andphase of the shaft vibration high spot relative to an abso-lute shaft reference.

> To access the Tracking Filter menu:• From the Applications menu, press 3 or move

pointer bar to 3:Tracking Filter and press< ENTER> . The Tracking Filter menu dis-plays (Figure 4 - 45).

The Applications MenuTracking Filter

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 65User Manual change 01

Page 226: E-MANUAL

app-3.pcx

> To take data:• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Take Data

and press <ENTER> . The screen in Figure 4- 46 displays. Data collection automatically pro-ceeds.

Figure 4 - 45.The Tracking Filter Menu.

The Applications MenuTracking Filter

4 - 66 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 227: E-MANUAL

d252.pcx

• Press <ENTER> to save the collected data.

> To set up the Tracking Filter options:• From the Tracking Filter menu, press 2 or

move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and press< ENTER> . The Tracking Filter Setupscreen displays (Figure 4 - 47).

Figure 4 - 46.The Tracking Filter Data Collection Screen.

The Applications MenuTracking Filter

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 67User Manual change 01

Page 228: E-MANUAL

app-6.pcx

Tracking Filter Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 16 characters to uniquely identify this joband press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advances tothe next field (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe equipment and the exact locationwhere a measurement is to be recorded.

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press <EN-TER> The pointer bar advances to the next field(Type).

Figure 4 - 47.The Tracking Filter Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuTracking Filter

4 - 68 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 229: E-MANUAL

¾ Refer to pages 4 - 23 through 4 - 27 fordescriptions of Tracking Filter Setupfields:

Type Full ScaleDetection InputBandwidth Average TypeTrigger Slope

Cyclic Analysis

The Applications menu’s Cyclic Analysis option supportstime based, dynamic signal analysis displayed in degreesor in milliseconds, providing a plot of magnitude vs. crankangle of cyclic events.

> To access the Cyclic Analysis menu:• From the Applications menu, press 4, or move

the pointer bar to 4:Cyclic Analysis and press< ENTER> . The Cyclic Analysis screen dis-plays (Figure 4 - 48).

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 69User Manual change 01

Page 230: E-MANUAL

app-4.pcx

> To take data:• Press 1, or move the pointer bar to 1:Take Data

and press <ENTER> . The screen in Figure 4- 49 displays. Data collection automatically pro-ceeds.

Figure 4 - 48.The Cyclic Analysis Screen.

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

4 - 70 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 231: E-MANUAL

app-9.pcx

• Press <SAVE> to save the collected data.

> To set up Cyclic Analysis options:• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and

press <ENTER> . The screen in Figure 4 -50 displays.

Figure 4 - 49.The Cyclic Analysis Take Data Screen.

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 71User Manual change 01

Page 232: E-MANUAL

app-8.pcx

Cyclic Analysis Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Desc).

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Type).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe equipment and the exact locationwhere a measurement is to be recorded.

Figure 4 - 50.The Cyclic Analysis Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

4 - 72 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 233: E-MANUAL

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity,displacement, volts, SEE, ENV Acc, ENV Vel, pres-sure) which depends upon the type of seismic sensorused (accelerometer, velocity pickup, proximityprobe, or SEE sensor). Press MENU to view thechoices.• Select your choice for Type of measurement

with the pointer bar and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - The units for this field were automatically de-termine when you selected Type.

• Enter a numerical full scale value and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Detection).

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS or Pk

to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal andpress <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Input ).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) perEngineering Unit (EU) and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on the screen(Cycles).

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 73User Manual change 01

Page 234: E-MANUAL

Cycles - Enter the number of 1X cycles you wish to viewin the full scale display and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Samples).

For a given number of cycles and samples, the follow-ing table specifies the maximum rotational speed. Ifthe maximum speed is exceeded unpredictable resultsoccur.

CyclesSamples

256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384

Maximum Rotational Speed

1 200 Hz 100 Hz 50 Hz 25 Hz 12.5 Hz 6.25 Hz 3.13 Hz

2 400 200 100 50 25 12.5 6.25

3 600 300 150 75 37.5 18.75 9.38

4 800 400 200 100 50 25 12.5

5 1000 500 250 125 62.5 31.25 15.63

6 1200 600 300 150 75 37.5 18.75

For example, if 1 cycle and 512 samples is chosen the rota-tional speed cannot exceed 100 Hz.

Samples - The total number of samples in the number ofcycles that you wish to view in the full scale display.Press MENU to view the choices.• Select a value for Samples with the pointer bar

and press <ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (AverageType).

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

4 - 74 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 235: E-MANUAL

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Off - The same as setting the number of averages to1; the data is scaled by the selected method of detec-tion and will update at its maximum.

Sync Time - Averaging in the time domain. Thismethod of averaging requires a reference trigger.Components within the signal which are synchronouswith the reference trigger are reinforced, while noisequickly averages out. Synchronous time domain aver-aging produces the most improvement in signal tonoise ratio, and is advantageous whenever it isdeemed necessary to extract very low amplitude sig-nals or to minimize the noise produced by the vibra-tion of other machines nearby. When this method ofaveraging is selected, the spectrum produced and dis-played is the FFT of the averaged synchronous timedomain samples.• Select your choice for Type with the pointer bar

and press <ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (AverageMode).

Average Mode - Displays only if Average Type:SyncTime is selected. Press MENU to view the choices.

Cont. - Averaging of the latest N samples, where Nis the number of averages selected for the sample.Equivalent to exponential averaging where the latestspectrum ensemble replaces the oldest in the averagedsum.

Finite - Averaging proceeds for N samples. The aver-aging process stops and the result is displayed. (Thisis the averaging mode in Route Spectrum:Show dur-ing Route data collection.)

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 75User Manual change 01

Page 236: E-MANUAL

Repeat - Averaging proceeds for N samples, where Nis the number of averages you chose for the sample.The spectrum average is displayed after N samplesare taken. The display is updated after each finite av-erage.• Select your choice for Average Mode with the

pointer bar and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Averages).

Averages - Displays only if Average Type: Sync Time isselected. If an external trigger is available (time syn-chronous averaging is allowable in Average Type),set Averages to achieve adequate signal-to-noise en-hancement in the time domain (from 4 to above 200depending on how close the conflicting signals are).

• Enter the number of spectrum ensembles to besummed (between 1 and 9999).

• Press <ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (X AxisLabel).

X Axis Label - Allows time data to be displayed in de-grees as a multiple of the machine rotation (for exam-ple: 360, 720 degrees), or in milliseconds. PressMENU to view choices.

• Select Degree or MSec with the pointer bar andpress <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Trigger Slope).

The Applications MenuCyclic Analysis

4 - 76 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 237: E-MANUAL

Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view choices.• Select plus or minus with the pointer bar to de-

termine whether the trigger occurs on a risingor descending signal.

• Press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Trigger Delay).

Trigger Delay - Trigger delay is used to view pre-triggeror post-trigger information. • Enter number of degrees to offset the reference

pulse. The pointer bar advances to the nextfield on the screen (Cursor Type).

Cursor Type - The full width cross is easiest to observeand recommended for use. Press MENU to viewchoices.

• Select Cursor Type with the pointer bar andpress <ENTER> .

Current Analysis Setup

The Applications menu’s Current Analysis option simpli-fies the process of analyzing and diagnosing AC inductionmotor rotor bar defects.

> To access the Current Analysis menu:• At the Applications menu, press 5 or move the

pointer bar to 5:Current Analysis and press< ENTER> . The Current Analysis TakeData/Setup menu appears.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 77User Manual change 01

Page 238: E-MANUAL

> To set up Current Analysis options:• From the Current Analysis menu, press 2 or

move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and press< ENTER> . The Current Analysis Setupscreen displays (Figure 4 - 51).

app-10.pcx

Current Analysis Setup screen field options are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Desc).

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Type).

Figure 4 - 51.The Current Analysis Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

4 - 78 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 239: E-MANUAL

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe equipment and the exact locationwhere a measurement is to be recorded.

Type - Determines type of current data collected. PressMENU to view choices.

Current Zoom - Allows zoomed spectrum analysisof AC induction motor input current.

Enveloped Current - Allows analysis of the AC in-duction motor pole passing frequency by demodulat-ing the input current signal.

¾ The POINT Type selected determineswhich Setup screens fields will be dis-played.

Line Frequency - The frequency of the AC power sup-plied to the motor tested. • Enter a numerical value for Line Frequency

(for example, 60 Hz) and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Full Scale).

¾ Current Zoom measurements use thisfield to determine the frequency to zoomon. Enveloped Current measurementsuse this as a reference parameter for dis-play only.

Full Scale - The units for this field are amps.• Enter a numerical full scale value and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Input ).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) perEngineering Unit (EU) and press <ENTER> . The

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 79User Manual change 01

Page 240: E-MANUAL

pointer bar advances to the next field o the screen(Detection).

¾ The sensitivity of the motor current clampmust be modified when not directly meas-uring the motor line current. The currentto the control station is always reduced byline current transformer. For example,when measurements are made at the mo-tor control station, if the transformer is100 to 1, then the normal motor currentclamp sensitivity must be changed from 1mV/Amp to .01 mV/Amp.

Detection - Press MENU to vie the choices.• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS or Pk

to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal andpress <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (SynchronousRPM).

Lines - Lines determines the basic resolution of the spec-trum. Press MENU to view the choices.

frequency rangelines resolution = frequency seqment size

1,000 Hz400 lines = 2.5 Hz

If, for example, you choose 400 lines and a frequencyrange from 0 to 1,000 Hz, the basic resolution of thespectrum will be 1,000 divided by 400 or 2.5 Hz.

This means that the x-axis is divided into 400 seg-ments spaced 2.5 Hz apart.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

4 - 80 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 241: E-MANUAL

¾ Recognize that increased resolution re-quires increased time for data collectionand consumes more storage memory.

• Select your choice for number of Lines of reso-lution with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Number of Averages).

Number of Averages - If Average Type is Pk Hold, setNumber of Averages:1, and set AverageMode:Cont. Since Average Mode:Cont is chosen,the peak value is updated for each spectrum ensemble.

If Average Type is Average, set Number of Aver-ages:6. This is a reasonable number of spectrum av-erages to allow a POINT measurement to be made inless than 10 seconds.

If an external trigger is available (time synchronousaveraging is allowable in Average Type), set Num-ber of Averages to achieve adequate signal-to-noiseenhancement in the time domain (from 4 to above200 depending on how close the conflicting signalsare).• Enter the number of spectrum ensembles to be

summed (between 1 and 9999).

• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (AverageType).

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Off - Produces the same results as setting AverageType:Average and Number of Averages:1. TheFFT displays components scaled by the selectedmethod of detection and updates at its maximum, real-time rate.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 81User Manual change 01

Page 242: E-MANUAL

Average - The summation of the magnitude of eachspectral line is divided by the total number of aver-ages (ensemble averaging). This is the most fre-quently used method of averaging for routine datacollection and analysis.

Pk Hold - Peak Hold holds the highest value receivedat each spectral line during the averaging time. Thismethod of averaging is very useful when the signalcontains a great deal of amplitude variation and theprimary objective of the analysis is to see the maxi-mum reached by each component.

¾ For time waveforms, Average Type:Aver-age and Average Type:Pk Hold are notrecommended. Use Average Type:SyncTime instead.

Sync(hronous) Time - Averaging in the time do-main. This method of averaging requires a referencetrigger. Components within the signal which are syn-chronous with the reference trigger are reinforced,while noise quickly averages out. Synchronous timedomain averaging produces the most improvement insignal to noise ratio, and is advantageous whenever itis deemed necessary to extract very low amplitude sig-nals or to minimize the “noise” produced by the vi-bration of other machines nearby. When this methodof averaging is selected, the spectrum produced anddisplayed is the FFT of the averaged synchronoustime domain samples.

¾ To display Sync(hronous) Time averag-ing set the Trigger Source to External.

• Select your choice for Average Type with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . The

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

4 - 82 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 243: E-MANUAL

pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Average Mode).

Average Mode - Select the type of FFT average comple-tion. Press MENU to view the choices.

Cont(inuous) - Averaging of the latest N samples,where N is the number of averages selected for thesample. Equivalent to exponential averaging wherethe latest spectrum ensemble replaces the oldest inthe averaged sum.

Finite - Averaging proceeds for N samples. The aver-aging process stops and the result is displayed. (Thisis the averaging mode in Route Spectrum:Show dur-ing Route data collection.)

Repeat - Averaging proceeds for N samples, where Nis the number of averages you chose for the sample.

The spectrum average is displayed after N samplesare taken. The display is updated after each finite av-erage.

• Select your choice for Average Mode with thepointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Average Overlap).

Average Overlap - Overlap processing is advantageouswhen the time required to gather a time record ismuch longer than the time needed to calculate anFFT spectrum. In the Microlog this occurs at fre-quencies below 1,000 Hz (60,000 CPM).

For lower frequencies, the amount of overlap can beincreased to reduce the time required to collect agiven number of averages. Recognize, however, that

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 83User Manual change 01

Page 244: E-MANUAL

the greater the overlap, the more information sharedbetween averages. Press MENU to view the choices.

Max - Uses whatever data is in the time record at thetime. This can be existing data, new data, or a mix-ture depending on how long it takes to collect time re-cord data. Results in the shortest averaging time butmay lack statistical accuracy.

75% - Uses 75% of existing data and 25% of newdata to calculate new FFT.

50% - Uses 50% of existing data and 50% of newdata to calculate new FFT.

None - Each spectrum ensemble is new data added tothe sum.

Overlap processing is used to obtain enough new en-semble data for an accurate average. If the maximumfrequency is low and the FFT process time is fast, theaverage sum would include a high percent of old datawith maximum overlap. Below 2 kHz, 50% overlapand six averages is a reasonable ROUTE setup.

• Select your choice for Average Overlap withthe pointer bar and press < ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Window).

Window - The type of window used in the FFT process-ing. A window function must be applied to any peri-odic time record prior to performing an FFT tominimize leakage errors. The Hanning and Flat Topwindow functions attenuate to zero both the leadingand trailing edges of the time domain buffer (to pre-vent leakage error caused by discontinuities in thetime record). Press MENU to view the choices.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

4 - 84 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 245: E-MANUAL

Hanning - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-tion that provides better frequency resolution thanFlat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy. Use-ful for machine vibration measurements, general pur-pose measurements, and measurements containingrandom noise.

Uniform - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-tion with uniform weighting across time. Useful formeasuring transients or mechanical response measure-ments and in tracking mode.

Flat Top - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-tion which provides the best amplitude accuracy formeasuring discrete frequency components. Usefulfor calibration or machine vibration measurements us-ing displacement probes in fluid-film bearings.

Select your choice for Window with the pointer barand press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances tothe next field on the screen (Synchronous RPM).

Synchronous RPM - Enter the motor’s SynchronousRPM number located on the motor nameplate.

• Press <ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (MotorNameplate Data).

Motor Nameplate Data - Press MENU to view choices.

OFF - Data not necessary for searching for pole pass-ing frequency.

Specify - Allows specific motor information to be en-tered. • Select your choice for Motor Nameplate Data

and press <ENTER> .

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 85User Manual change 01

Page 246: E-MANUAL

¾ When Motor Nameplate Data:Specify isselected, three additional fields are dis-played on the Current Analysis Setupscreen.

Rated Full Load RPM - Enter the motor’s RatedFull Load RPM number located on the motor name-plate.• Press <ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-

vances to the next field on the screen (RatedFull Load Amps).

Rated Full Load Amps - Enter the motor’s RatedFull Load Amps number located on the motor name-plate.• Press <ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-

vances to the next field on the screen (Rated NoLoad Amps).

Rated No Load Amps - Enter the motor’s Rated NoLoad Amps number located on the motor nameplate.

This completes Current Analysis set up.

Current Analysis Data Collection

Current Zoom

> To collect current zoom data:• With Type:Current Zoom selected in the Cur-

rent Analysis Setup menu, press 1 or move thepointer bar to 1:Take Data and press <EN-TER> . The Current Analysis Data Collec-tion screen displays (Figure 4 - 52) and datacollection automatically proceeds.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Data Collection

4 - 86 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 247: E-MANUAL

catd-1.pcx

Screen information includes:

Number of Averages - The number of averages includedin this measurement.

Line Freq - The power line’s frequency (50Hz or 60 Hz).

Pole Pass Freq - The frequency where defect amplitude ismeasured (motor poles x motorslip).

Cursor Freq - The frequency of the cursor position.

Load - The actual motor load current.

Figure 4 - 52.The Current Zoom Data Collection Screen.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 87User Manual change 01

Page 248: E-MANUAL

RPM/Slip - The motor running speed at cursor position.% Slip based on the RPM and the entered Synchro-nous RPM.

% Slip = Sync RPM − RPM

Sync RPM x 100

Condition Ratio - The ratio of the defect amplitude to linecurrent as a relative DB ratio.

Condition Ratio = −20 log ( Defect AmplitudeLine Current Amplitude)

• Press < SAVE> to save the collected data. • When measurement is complete, pressing the

F3 function key displays the ROTOR BARCONDITION ASSESSMENT REPORTscreen (Figure 4 - 53).

conases.pcx

Figure 4 - 53.The Rotor Bar Condition Assessment Report Screen.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Data Collection

4 - 88 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 249: E-MANUAL

The ROTOR BAR CONDITION ASSESSMENT RE-PORT screen displays a table of motor defect diagnosticcriteria. For example, 54-60 implies excellent operation.

• Press F3 to display the CONDITION ASSESS-MENT LIMITATIONS screen (Figure 4 - 54).

limit.pcx

The CONDITION ASSESSMENT LIMITATIONSscreen displays specific conditions which must be met inorder for the previous diagnosis to be accurate.

Figure 4 - 54.The Condition Assessment Limitations Screen.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Data Collection

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 89User Manual change 01

Page 250: E-MANUAL

Enveloped Current

> To collect enveloped current data:• With Type:Enveloped Current selected in the

Current Analysis Setup menu, press 1 or movethe pointer bar to 1:Take Data and press <EN-TER> . The Current Analysis Data Collec-tion screen displays (Figure 4 - 55) and datacollection automatically proceeds.

envelcur.pcx

• Press <SAVE> to save the collected data.

The Condition Ratio for an Enveloped Current POINTis the ratio of the peak at the cursor to the overall ampli-tude. This ratio is expressed as a percentage.

Condition Ratio = Current Value at CursorOverall x 100

Figure 4 - 55.The Enveloped Current Data Collection Screen.

The Applications MenuCurrent Analysis Data Collection

4 - 90 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 251: E-MANUAL

A condition ratio criteria has been empirically determinedfor Envelope Current measurements. It has been sug-gested that the rotor bar failure alert alarm be based on thecondition ratio exceeding 25%. That is, if the pole passpeak level is greater than 25% of the overall RMS level,then there is probable cause for concern of rotor degrada-tion.

Bump Test

A bump test (also called a hammer test) determines thenatural frequencies of a machine or a structure. The ideabehind the test is that when an object is impacted or“bumped,” the object’s natural or resonant frequencies areexcited. If a spectrum is taken while the object is vibrat-ing due to the impact, spectral peaks result, pinpointingthe object’s natural frequencies. A Microlog analyzer canbe used to capture this vibration response and to display aspectrum showing the resonant or natural frequencies.

Why Do a Bump Test?Vibration forces transmitted by rotating machines often ex-cite natural resonances in attached structures. Wheneversuch structural resonances appear, vibration responses areamplified and can result in fatigue failures. Structuralresonances can also mask the cause of a machine’s vibra-tion making it difficult to implement corrective machinemaintenance. Bump tests identify a structure’s resonantmodes and provide a maintenance engineer the opportunityto change the resonance frequency so as to reduce or elimi-nate damaging vibration.

The Applications MenuBump Test

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 91User Manual change 01

Page 252: E-MANUAL

> To perform a bump test with your Microlog:• Attach an accelerometer to the CMVA60.

• From the Utilities/System Setup menu, movethe pointer bar to Connector and press MENUto view choices (Figure 4 - 56).

syscon.pcx

• Select the connector type for which the acceler-ometer is attached.

• Attach the accelerometer to the test object (ma-chine case or structure).

• From the Applications menu, press 6 or movethe pointer bar to 6:Bump Test and press < EN-TER> . The Bump Test menu appears (Figure4 - 57).

Figure 4 - 56.The System Settings/Connector Menu.

The Applications MenuBump Test

4 - 92 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 253: E-MANUAL

bumptest.pcx

Bump Test menu options are:

Take Data - Begins the data collection (Figure 4 - 58).During data collection the Microlog automaticallycompensates for a signal overload condition. To savethe data, press the SAVE key. Pressing the <ES-CAPE> key exiting the data collection mode.

Figure 4 - 57. The Bump Test Menu.

The Applications MenuBump Test

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 93User Manual change 01

Page 254: E-MANUAL

bumptst2.pcx

Setup - Allows the user to change the default settings forInput , Full scale, Trigger Level and Maximum fre-quency.

¾ Upon entering this menu option, a mes-sage displays (only if parameter changesare detected) prompting the operator to re-set parameters back to default, if desired.

Run Up/Coast Down

The Applications menu’s Run Up/Coast Down optionperforms an order analysis which requires a trigger and asensor input connected to either the BNCs or the 25-pinconnector. When the Microlog begins to collect data, itfirst date and time stamps the current job. As the targetmachine speed is ramping up or coasting down, it stores

Figure 4 - 58. The Bump Test Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 94 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 255: E-MANUAL

the changing speed and its corresponding 1X speed magni-tude and phase values in a temporary buffer. The data inthe buffer is available for the operator to inspect and toprint in both table and graphic formats at the end of thedata collection process. If the operator desires to save thecurrent job, the Microlog moves the data as well as thesetup parameters to the permanent storage memory (whichdoesn’t require battery power), therefore, in the event of apower loss, data is not loss. Each Microlog can store upto a maximum of 20 jobs and each job may contain a maxi-mum of 100 points.

¾ Currently, Run Up/Coast Down data can-not be uploaded to PRISM.

> To initiate the Run Up/Coast Down operation:

¾ If an operator ID list has been down-loaded and enabled, an operator ID mustbe selected from the list to access the Ap-plications menu

• From the Applications menu, press 7 or movethe pointer bar to 7:Run Up/Coast Down andpress <ENTER> . The Run Up/Coast Downmenu displays (Figure 4 - 59).

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 95User Manual change 01

Page 256: E-MANUAL

rucd-mnu.pcx

Run Up/Coast Down menu options are:

1:Take Data - Begins the data collection process. Whenthe process is complete, the data in the temporarybuffer displays on the screen. The operator has the op-tion to save the data by selecting the Save new Dataoption from the Options menu or by pressing theSAVE key. Temporary data may be deleted by press-ing the <ESCAPE> key.

2:Setup - Displays fields for designating the job ID and de-scription and to set up data collection parameters.When reviewing a saved job from permanent mem-ory, the setup parameters from the job being reviewedare reloaded and can be read. The setup parameterscan also be reloaded from a saved job to eliminatesetup time.

Figure 4 - 59. The Run Up/Coast Down Menu.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 96 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 257: E-MANUAL

3:Review Data - Chronologically displays a list of savedjobs on the screen. The operator can select a job to re-view, to print, or to delete.

Take Data

> To collect Run Up/Coast Down data:• From the Applications menu, press 7 or move

the pointer bar to 7:Run Up/Coast Down op-tion and press <ENTER> .

• If it is not already there, move the pointer bar to1:Take Data and press <ENTER> .

¾ If the Microlog runs out of permanentmemory to save the next new job, the fol-lowing message appears.

This unit can only hold 20 RunUp/Coast Down jobs. Please enter Re-view Data to delete one of the jobs inmemory before taking new data.

The screen of Figure 4 - 60 displays and allows the user toverify that the inputs are installed correctly. If the inputsare not correct, using this screen adjust the sensors untilthey are correct.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 97User Manual change 01

Page 258: E-MANUAL

f ig4-48.pcx

When the inputs are OK, press<ENTER> , the screen inFigure 4 - 61 displays. The CMVA60 is in the data collec-tion mode and begins to collect data when the speed iswithin the defined speed limits.

Figure 4 - 60.The Run Up/Coast Down Take Data Screen.

Figure 4 - 61.The Run Up/Coast Down Take Data Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 98 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 259: E-MANUAL

¾ The viewing of the phase plot in reviewcan be switched between 0-360o and in+ /-180o phase types regardless of thephase type used when the data was re-corded. The phase scale can be switchedin the Setup dialog.

Data fields on the screen are:

Overall - The overall magnitude in the appropriate unit.

Speed - The current speed in Hz or in CPM.

In Run-up mode, the target machine is initiallystopped, or running at a very low speed. The applica-tion starts to record data when the speed has in-creased above the Low Speed and terminates whenthe current speed is greater than the High Speed.

In Coast-down mode, the target machine is initiallyrunning at full speed. The application starts to recorddata when the speed has decreased below the HighSpeed and terminates when the current speed is lessthan the Low Speed.

The speed displayed in this field before the Microlog startscollecting data can be used to check if the tachometer iscorrectly installed.

1xSpeed Mag - The 1X speed magnitude in the appropri-ate units.

The Run Up/Coast Down application uses a simplerbut faster autorange process. Each time an over-loaded signal occurs, it automatically doubles the fullscale.

1xSpeed Pha - The 1X speed phase in DEG.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 99User Manual change 01

Page 260: E-MANUAL

Number of data points - The number of data pointsstored in the temporary buffer. This field is 0 whenfirst entering the data collection mode and remains at0 until the Microlog starts collecting data when theStart Speed condition is satisfied. A maximum of100 points are allowed for each job.

¾ When the Microlog is collecting data, itspower conserving automatic shutoff func-tion is disabled.

The data collecting process terminates when one of the fol-lowing conditions is met.

• The current speed satisfies the Speed condition.

• ESCAPE is pressed. • The number of data points taken is equal to 100.

Upon termination, the recorded data displays in table for-mat for inspection (Figure 4 - 62).

rucd-dat.pcx

Figure 4 - 62.The Run Up/Coast Down Collected Data.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 100 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 261: E-MANUAL

The first four lines on the screen display the job ID, job de-scription, and time and date stamps when data was col-lected. The sixth line displays column headings. Theseventh line displays column units. The Speed column unitis CPM or Hz depending on the current system setup. TheMag column unit is data type dependent. It can be dis-played in English or Metric units, depending on the cur-rent system setup. The next 16 lines display the data table.The table can be either scrolled by line using the UP AR-ROW or DOWN ARROW keys or by 16 line-page usingthe PGUP or PGDN keys.

With the Microlog’s Run Up/Coast Down data collectionscreen visible, press the MENU key to access several op-tions (Figure 4 - 63).

rncd-opt.pcx

Figure 4 - 63.The Run Up/Coast Down Options Menu.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 101User Manual change 01

Page 262: E-MANUAL

• To make a selection, press its number on the Mi-crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to yourselection and press <ENTER> .

¾ For experienced operators, shortcut keysare available to access each of the items inthe option menu.

The options are:

1:Data table (shortcut key F1) - Displays data in the tableformat as previously described.

2:Bode plot (shortcut key F2) - Displays data in dualgraph display (Figure 4 - 64), Mag vs Speed andPhase vs Speed.

bodeplot.bmp

¾ Phase display is continuous and Yscaledisplay may range multiple cycles.

Figure 4 - 64. A Bode Plot Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 102 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 263: E-MANUAL

¾ For ENV Acc POINTs, only the Mag vsSpeed graph displays, and the Pha fieldat the top of the screen is eliminated.

The cross hair cursors simultaneously move acrossboth graphs as the LEFT CURSOR or RIGHTCURSOR key is pressed. The cursors only stop at ac-tual data records (no interpolation). The speed, mag-nitude, phase, and Q values at the current locationdisplay at the top of the screen. The MODE field in-dicates whether the current job in run up or coastdown.

RU = Run UpCD = Coast Down

The phase graph is plotted as 0/360 DEG or -180/\180 DEG according to the how the setup was config-ured when data was taken.

3:Polar plot (shortcut key F3) - Displays the tempo-rary data in polar form (Figure 4 - 65).

POLARPLT.WMF

Figure 4 - 65. A Polar Plot Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 103User Manual change 01

Page 264: E-MANUAL

The cross hair cursor traces along the graph as theLEFT CURSOR or RIGHT CURSOR key ispressed. Cursors only stop at actual data records (nointerpolation). The speed, magnitude, phase and Qvalues at the current location display on top of thescreen. The MODE field indicates whether the cur-rent job in run up or coast down.

RU = Run UpCD = Coast Down

The current x and y coordinates display below thegraph. The option menu can be accessed by pressingthe MENU key to return to the data table or to per-form other functions.

4:Save new data (shortcut key SAVE) - Saves the currenttemporary data into permanent memory and returnsto the Run-up/Coast-down menu.

5:Print - Prints the data as displayed on the screen (in ta-ble format or graphic format).

¾ The Microlog is compatible with either adot matrix or laser printer.

If the < ESCAPE> key is pressed, the following confir-mation message displays before discarding the current datain the temporary memory.

Run Up/Coast Down data in memory!Save data before exit?Yes

• Press MENU to select a Yes or No response.

Yes - Data is saved before returning to the Run-up/Coast down menu.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 104 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 265: E-MANUAL

No - The screen returns to the Run-up/Coast downmenu. All data is erased from temporary memory.

¾ In the event that the Microlog turns itselfoff to conserve battery power before datais saved, data is not lost. Data remains intemporary memory until the next time theRun-up/Coast down application is run.The screen automatically displays the datafor review before it collects data for thenew job. However, if the Microlog runsout of battery power before the data issaved, data is lost.

Setup

> To access the Run Up/Coast Down Setup screen:• From the Run Up/Coast Down menu, press 2

or move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and press< ENTER> . The Setup screen displays (Fig-ure 4 - 66).

rucd-set.pcx

Figure 4 - 66.A Run Up/Coast Down Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 105User Manual change 01

Page 266: E-MANUAL

The following parameters may be set up using the Setupmenu.

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identifythe run up/coast down job.

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Type).

Type - The type of measurement (accelerations, velocity,displacement, envelope). Press MENU to view thechoices. • Select your choice for Type of measurement

with the pointer bar and press <ENTER> .The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Full scale).

¾ If you selected ENV Acc, two additionalfields display named Env Filter and Num-ber of Orders.

Env Filter - Press MENU to view the choices.

5 Hz - 100 Hz50 Hz - 1 kHz

500 Hz - 10 kHz5 kHz - 40 kHz

• Select your choice of filter range and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Number of Orders).

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 106 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 267: E-MANUAL

Number of Orders - (env. acc. POINTs only) - Allowsthe operator to monitor magnitude at a frequencyother than 1X speed, which is default for Runup/Coast Down applications. This is useful whenmonitoring bearing fault frequency amplitudes duringRU/CD operations.• Enter the desired frequency as a multiple of run-

ning speed (maximum = 50X speed).

¾ When applied, the RU/CD data collectionscreen displays 1XSpeed Mag/Phase, eventhough displayed values relate to the fre-quency specified in the Number of Ordersfield described above.

• Press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Full scale).

Full scale - The units for this field were automatically de-termined when you selected Type.• Enter a numerical full scale value and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field on the screen (Detection).

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

¾ Refer to the table on page 2-10 for a list-ing of the Microlog’s methods of signaldetection and scaling for overall dynamicmeasurements.

• Select one of the three methods (Peak, RMS,or Pk to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signaland press <ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field on the screen (Input ).

Input - Enter the transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv)per Engineering Unit (EU) and press <ENTER> .

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 107User Manual change 01

Page 268: E-MANUAL

The pointer bar advances to the next field on thescreen (Trigger Slope).

Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view the choices.• Select plus or minus with the pointer bar to de-

termine whether the trigger occurs on a risingor descending signal.

• Press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Mode).

Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

In Run-up mode, the target machine is initiallystopped, or running at a very low speed. The applica-tion starts to record data when the speed has in-creased above the Low Speed and terminates whenthe current speed is greater than the High Speed.

In Coast-down mode, the target machine is initiallyrunning at full speed. The application starts to re-cord data when the speed has decreased below theHigh Speed and terminates when the current speed isless than the Low Speed.

• Select Run Up or Coast Down with the pointerbar.

• Press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field on the screen (Low Speed).

Low Speed - Enter the low speed limit of the interestedspeed range. Press <ENTER> . The pointer baradvances to the next field on the screen (High Speed).

High Speed - Enter the high speed limit of the interestedspeed range. Press <ENTER> . The pointer baradvances to the next field on the screen (Delta speedcalc).

Delta speed calc - Press MENU to view the choices.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 108 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 269: E-MANUAL

Equal Interval - Divide the Start and Stop Speedsinto equal 100 speed intervals. This ensures the entirespeed range is covered. The total number of data re-cords taken for a job may be less than 100 if the Mi-crolog is not able to catch up with the speed change.

1% previous speed - The new speed interval is 1 %of the previous speed. This method ensures moremeasurements are collected at the lower speed range,which may help to better define a critical. If the ma-chine’s speed changes very slowly at low speed, the100 data records are not able to cover the entirespeed range.• Select your choice for Delta speed calc and

press <ENTER> .

• Press <ESCAPE> to return to the RunUp/Coast Down menu.

Review Data

> To review a Run Up/Coast Down saved job:• From the Run Up/Coast Down menu, press 3

or move the pointer bar to 3:Review Data andpress <ENTER> . The Review Data screen(Figure 4 - 67) displays a list of job IDs saved inpermanent memory (in chronological order).

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 109User Manual change 01

Page 270: E-MANUAL

joblist.pcx

¾ If there are no jobs saved in permanentmemory, the following message displays.

No Run Up/Coast Down job in memory.

Press any key to return to the Run-up/Coast Down menu.

¾ To delete a job from permanent memory,move the pointer bar to the desired joband press DELETE .

• Use the UP/DOWN CURSOR to move thepointer bar to the job for review and press< ENTER> . The Review Data screen dis-plays (Figure 4 - 68) for the selected job.

Figure 4 - 67.The Review Data Selection Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 110 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 271: E-MANUAL

rev-dat.pcx

When reviewing a selected job’s data records, the recordeddata is displayed in table format for inspection. The firstfour lines on the screen show the job ID , job Description,TIME and DATE stamps when the data was collected. Ifthe Operator ID is turned on and the data was collectedwith Operator ID, the fifth line displays the Operator ID ;otherwise, if the data was collected without Operator ID,the fifth line displays "No Operator ID."

¾ The fifth line is blank if the Operator IDis turned off.

The sixth line displays column headings. The seventh linedisplays column units. The Speed column unit is CPM orHz (depending on the current system setup). The Mag col-umn unit is data type dependent. It can be displayed inEnglish or Metric units (depending on the current systemsetup). The next 16 lines are for display the data table.

Figure 4 - 68.The Run Up/Coast Down Review Data Screen.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 111User Manual change 01

Page 272: E-MANUAL

The table can be either scrolled by line using the UP AR-ROW or DOWN ARROW keys or by 16 line-page usingthe PGUP or PGDN keys.

When the Review Data screen is visible on the Microlog,you may press the MENU key to access several options (re-fer to Figure 4 - 64).

• To make a selection, press its number on the Mi-crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to yourselection and press <ENTER> .

¾ For experienced operators, shortcut keysare available to access each of the items inthe option menu.

The options on the screen are:

1:Data table (shortcut key F1) - Displays the data for theselected job in the table format as described above

2:Bode plot (shortcut key F2) - Displays the data for theselected job in dual graph display (refer to Figure 4 - 53),Mag vs Speed and Phase vs Speed. For ENV AccPOINTs, only the Mag vs Speed graph displays, and thePha field at the top of the screen is eliminated.

The cross hair cursors simultaneously move acrossboth graphs as the LEFT CURSOR or the RIGHTCURSOR key is pressed. The cursors only stop atthe actual data records (no interpolation). The speed,magnitude, phase and Q values at the current locationdisplay at the top of the screen. The MODE field in-dicates whether the current job in run up or coastdown.

RU = Run UpCD = Coast Down

The Phase display’s Y scale is continuous and mayrange multiple cycles.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 112 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 273: E-MANUAL

¾ Press <ESCAPE> at any time while re-viewing data to return to the Job listscreen.

3:Polar plot (shortcut key F3) - Displays the data forthe selected job in polar form (refer to Figure 4 - 54).The cross hair cursor traces along the graph as theLEFT CURSOR or RIGHT CURSOR key ispressed. The cursors only stop at the actual datapoints with no interpolation. The speed, magnitude,phase and Q values at the current location display ontop of the screen. The MODE field indicates whetherthe current job in run up or coast down.

RU = Run UpCD = Coast Down

The current x and y coordinates display below thegraph. The option menu can be accessed by pressingthe MENU key to return to data table or to performother functions.

4:Save new data - Has no function, since the data has al-ready been saved.

5:Print - Prints the data as displayed on the screen (in ta-ble format or graphic format).

¾ The Microlog is compatible with either adot matrix or laser printer.

If the Microlog detects no printer connection, the follow-ing message appears:

PRINTER CONNECTOR NEEDED

While the Microlog is printing, the following message ap-pears on screen:PRINTING REPORT

Print Table Report

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 113User Manual change 01

Page 274: E-MANUAL

report1.pcx

Fields on a table report are:

SERIAL No - The Microlog unit serial number.

ID - Identifies the job for the collected data.

Figure 4 - 69.An Example of a Run Up/Coast Down Table Report.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 114 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 275: E-MANUAL

Desc - A brief job description.

TIME - The time the data was collected.

DATE - The date the data was collected.

Operator ID - Printed only if the data was collected withOperator ID active and a list of Operator ID is avail-able in the Microlog at the time the report wasprinted.

Setup Parameters - The following information is deter-mined by the values entered in the Setup menu.• Start Speed• Stop Speed• Type• Trigger Slope• Delta speed calc• Phase Type• Detection• Env Filter• Number of Orders• Mode

¾ The last two fields (Env Filter and Num-ber of Orders) are available only if Typeis set to Env Acc.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 115User Manual change 01

Page 276: E-MANUAL

Print Graph Reportreport2.pcx

Figure 4 - 70.An Example of a Print Graph Report.

The Applications MenuRun Up/Coast Down

4 - 116 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 277: E-MANUAL

The printed information is identical to the print table re-port except the data is presented in Bode or Polar plots.For the ENV Acc point type, only the Mag vs Speedgraph is printed.

Configuration Wizard

The Configuration Wizard allows the operator is save upto 6 operator defined preset Application configurations.Each ConfigurationWizard option may be customizedand stored for application specific configuration.

Each of the 6 preset configurations can save one set of thefollowing Microlog setups:

Communication Setup (including modem setup)System SetupRoute SetupAnalyzer\InputAnalyzer\SpectrumAnalyzer\TriggerTracking Filter SetupCycic Analysis SetupMotor Current SetupBump Test Setup

The following Micolog configurations cannot be saved:

RunUp\CoastDown SetupBalancing SetupOperator ID Enable\DisableNonroute Setups for

ProcessHFDRunning Speed

Report Control for printing

The Applications MenuConfiguration Wizard

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 117User Manual change 01

Page 278: E-MANUAL

> To access the Configuration Wizard menu:• From the Applications menu press 8 or move

the pointer bar to 8:Configuration Wizard andpress <ENTER> . The Configuration Wiz-ard menu displays (Figure 4-71).

¾ When a new Microlog is received fromthe factory, all 6 Configuration Wizard sare labeled DEFAULT .

configw iz.bmp

• Select the desired configuration and press < EN-TER> , an Options menu displays (Figure 4-72).

Figure 4 - 71.The Configuration Wizard Screen.

The Applications MenuConfiguration Wizard

4 - 118 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 279: E-MANUAL

confw iz2.pcx

Configuration Wizard Options are:

1:Recall - Sets the Microlog’s current configuration to thesettings specified by the selected stored configuration.

> To recall a configuration:• Highlight the desired configuration and press

< ENTER> . • From the Options menu, press 1. The preset

configuration is now active.

2:Store - Saves the current configuration to the selectedconfiguration.

Figure 4 - 72.The Configuration Wizard Options Menu.

The Applications MenuConfiguration Wizard

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 119User Manual change 01

Page 280: E-MANUAL

> To store the current configuration to a preset configura-tion:

Before accessing the Configuration Wizard application, de-fine all desired set up parameters in their correspondingSetup dialogs.

• After all settings are defined, from the Applica-tions menu press 8 or move the pointer bar to8:Configuration Wizard and press <EN-TER> . The Configuration Wizard screen dis-plays (see Figure 4-71).

• Move the pointer bar to the desired preset con-figuration and press <ENTER> . The Op-tions menu displays (see Figure 4-72).

• From the Options menu, press 2:Store, ascreen displays prompting for confirmation (Fig-ure 4-73).

confw iz3.pcx

Figure 4 - 73.The Confirmation Message.

The Applications MenuConfiguration Wizard

4 - 120 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 281: E-MANUAL

¾ Press <ESCAPE> to abort the storingprocess.

• Press <ENTER> to continue the storing proc-ess. The Setup information displays (Figure 4-74).

confw iz4.pcx

Setup screen parameters are:

Preset Name - Enter a unique name identifying the storedconfiguration.

Last Modified - The new configuration is automaticallydate and time stamped using the system clock.

Modified by - Enter the user’s name who modified theconfiguration.

Figure 4 - 74.The Configuration Wizard Setup Screen.

The Applications MenuConfiguration Wizard

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 121User Manual change 01

Page 282: E-MANUAL

• Press <ESCAPE> to begin the storing proc-ess. The following message displays.

Please wait...Wizard is saving Configuration.

When the storing process is complete, the following mes-sage displays.

Configuration is successfully saved.

3:Print - Prints the selected Preset Configuration to an at-tached printer. The preset configuration does not have tobe recalled to print.

The Applications MenuConfiguration Wizard

4 - 122 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 283: E-MANUAL

4-6-92 1:45 S. G.

5The Analyzer Menu

The Analyzer Function

Small size, light weight, and large graphic display com-bine to make the CMVA60 Microlog collector a powerful,exceptionally versatile analyzer capable of viewing thespectral content of complex dynamic vibration signals aswell as their time domain waveform. The Analyzer func-tion is intended for field troubleshooting and searching forspecific dynamic characteristics and frequency compo-nents on complex machinery, such as bladed turbines andcompressors.

Spectra can be stored from the Analyzer function for latertransfer into the host data base.

When in the Analyzer display, commonly used functionssuch as Freeze, Save, Markers On, and Zoom are actu-ated using function keys on the keypad.

Setup

To simplify the setup procedure, two Analyzer user modesare available, Analysis and Normal. These modes are se-lected from the System Setup menu in the 8:Utilities func-tion (see the Utilities chapter).

User Mode: Analysis provides access to all Analyzerfunctions.

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 1User Manual

Page 284: E-MANUAL

User Mode: Normal simplifies Analyzer operationby hiding option values for a number of options usedprimarily for highly specialized analyses.

¾ For the purposes of the following discus-sion, the Microlog is assumed to be set toUser Mode:Analysis with all functionsvisible and fully operational.

> To access the Analyzer function:• At the Main menu, press 5 or move the pointer

bar to 5:Analyzer and press < ENTER> . TheAnalyzer menu displays (Figure 5 - 1).

screen12.pcx

Figure 5 - 1.The CMVA60 Microlog Analyzer Menu.

The Analyzer MenuSetup

5 - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 285: E-MANUAL

boxtext

Collecting Dynamic Data

When you have completed the Analyzer setup, select theAnalyzer menu’s 1:Take Data option.

¾ Alarm levels for alarm 1 and alarm 2 inNonRoute and Analyzer modes are set in-ternally by the Microlog to 40% and 70%of full scale.

The Microlog does not allow dynamic data to be collectedduring overload state. It reports input signals too large forthe display with an OVERLOADED SIGNAL banner onthe screen, and with the overload indicator (OV) in the cen-ter of the status line (top line) of the display. If a signaloverload is indicated, increase the full scale amplituderange. As described in the NonRoute chapter, during datacollection the full scale amplitude range may be increasedor decreased from the Analyzer display by using the upand down arrow keys.

Depending on how you set Average Mode in SpectrumSetup, the FFT may continue to average beyond the cho-sen number of averages (Average Mode:Continuous), itmay stop averaging and freeze the display (AverageMode:Finite), or it may repeat the entire averaging proc-ess to the chosen number of averages (Average Mode:Re-peat).

With this flexibility the Microlog collector may be used toview an instantaneous time domain waveform or FFT in

¾ The functions of each of the setup menus are describedin detail in the NonRoute chapter. Refer to that chap-ter for guidance in setting Microlog up for Analyzerdata collection, then proceed to the next page.

The Analyzer MenuCollecting Dynamic Data

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 3User Manual

Page 286: E-MANUAL

real time; view an averaged spectrum as it is collected; col-lect, average, and freeze a spectrum; or view a repeatedspectrum.

The controllable cursor is moved right and left with theright and left arrow keys to display frequency, magnitude,phase, and order of any spectral component. Markers, de-fined on the Marker Setup menu, may be turned on andoff with the MKRS ON/OFF function key.

¾ When taking data using the Analyzermenu, the fmax may be doubled by press-ing PageUp key or cut in half by pressingthe Page Down key.

Using the Function Keys

The dedicated function keys are active and may be used inAnalyzer when desired. The name of each key is fol-lowed by a letter in parentheses. When a function keyfunction is activated, this letter displays on the right sideof the screen’s status line.

¾ Refer to pages 2 - 33 and 2 - 34 for de-scription of Functions Keys:

FREEZE ON/OFF MKRS ON/OFF

¾ F2 - With MKRS OFF, F2 causes thecursor to jump to the highest peak in thevicinity of the cursor. With MKRS ON,F2 causes the cursor to jump to the nextmarker.

The Analyzer MenuUsing the Function Keys

5 - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 287: E-MANUAL

Marker Mode:Cursor Lock

¾ Refer to pages 2 - 34 through 2 - 36 forMarker Mode:Cursor Lock - MarkerType functions.

Harmonic RelativeSideband

¾ When Marker Mode:Cursor Lock is ac-tive, the SHIFT key is locked ON when

the symbol displays in the middle ofthe top line of your screen.

With the SHIFT key locked ON, the har-monic 1X frequency is shifted one FFTbin sequence with each arrow key depres-sion.

Marker Mode:Fixed Freq

¾ Refer to pages 2 -36 and 2 - 37 forMarker Mode:Fixed Freq - MarkerType functions.

Harmonic RelativeSideband DISPLY EXPAND

SAVE

> To assign an ID to a dynamic data display and store thedata:

• Press the SAVE key, a 20-character window dis-plays.

• Enter the ID or IDs in the window.

The Analyzer MenuUsing the Function Keys

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 5User Manual

Page 288: E-MANUAL

• When the IDs have been specified, press < ENTER> to store the display.

ZOOM IN (Z): Zooms in on the FFT spectrum in the fre-quency domain (time domain displays are not affectedby ZOOM ) to provide more frequency resolution be-tween lines. The Microlog takes the frequency at thecursor position and progressively divides the fre-quency range by half each time you press the ZOOMIN key. The lines resolution across the zoomed fre-quency range remains approximately constant.

Example: Suppose the current frequency range isfrom 0 to 60000 CPM with 400 lines resolution andthe cursor is at 12000 CPM.

When you press ZOOM IN , the new frequency rangeis 30000 CPM with 400 lines resolution and the cur-sor will still be at 12000 CPM.

Press ZOOM IN again to produce a new frequencyrange of 15000 CPM with the cursor still at 12000CPM.

¾ Although the Microlog displays only aportion of the increased resolution spec-trum in ZOOM , the full frequency rangeis available at the same resolution in thesegment being displayed and can be exam-ined (panned) by moving the cursor be-yond the end of the visible frequencyrange with the left arrow or right arrowkeys. Panning moves the viewing windowto the right or left of the frequency range.

ZOOM OUT: Reverses ZOOM IN .

The Analyzer MenuUsing the Function Keys

5 - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 289: E-MANUAL

¾ Refer to pages 2 -38 through 2 - 40 fordescription of Marker Mode:Fixed Freq- Marker Type functions.

RESET MEASMT F1/F21XRPM LIN/LOG

PGUP - During data collection, press PGUP to doublethe maximum frequency.

PGDN - During data collection, press PGDN to cut themaximum frequency in half.

Phase Measurements

A phase measurement can be made in Analyzer mode be-tween the vibration measurement and an external phase ref-erence (such as the CMSS6165 StrobeLite, theCMSS6155 Optical Phase Reference, or the CMSS6195Laser Phase Reference) connected into the Micrologthrough the Model 6135D Phase Reference Adapter.

Phase measurements are made by selecting Trigger in theTrigger Mode field on the Trigger Setup menu followedby the appropriate selections for the trigger input signals.Reference this manual’s Applications section for specificsetup routines.

The Analyzer MenuPhase Measurements

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 7User Manual

Page 290: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

The Analyzer MenuPhase Measurements

5 - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 291: E-MANUAL

3-6-91 10:55 S.G.

6The Review Menu

Review allows you to view all of your saved data measure-ments. When you examine saved data in Review, you havethe option to add a note to a measurement POINT, or todelete a POINT’s data if it is not adequate and must be re-collected. Review’s operation is similar to that of Route’sexcept that measurements are viewed instead of collected.Some functions that are NOT available in Review areMake Reading, Manual Read, Zoom, Reset Measmt,and Save.

How To Use the Review Function

> To access the Review function:• At the Main menu, press 6 move the pointer bar

to 6:Review and press < ENTER> . A screensimilar to that in Figure 6 - 1 displays.

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 1User Manual

Page 292: E-MANUAL

ch10-08.pcx

• Move the pointer bar to the prime SET (PointSummary DB.1) and press < ENTER> , thenext line in the prime SET appears as in Figure6 - 2.

Figure 6 - 1. A ROUTE Hierarchy.

The Review Menu

6 - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 293: E-MANUAL

ch10-10.pcx

• Press < ENTER> , when a POINT is encoun-tered, you view a display of the data stored inthe Microlog (Figure 6 - 3).

Figure 6 - 2.A Subset of the Point Summary DB.1 Prime SET.

The Review Menu

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 3User Manual

Page 294: E-MANUAL

test.pcx

Letters corresponding to data stored are:

O Overall ValueS FFT SpectrumN NotesP PhaseT Time Domain

• Press < ENTER> again to display a spectrumcollection screen (Figure 6 - 4).

alarmmarker

type ofdatastored

Figure 6 - 3.Reviewing Data in a Dynamic Data Point Screen.

The Review Menu

6 - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 295: E-MANUAL

screen07.pcx

If Spectral Bands were defined, the screen dis-plays the bands on the spectrum. Peak values andsetpoints appear as dotted lines while Overall val-ues and setpoints appear as solid lines.

• Use the PgDn key to view a Spectral BandingInformation summary screen.

Information on this screen includes:

From (CPM) - The spectral band’s low frequency limit inCPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

To (CPM) - The spectral band’s high frequency limit inCPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Dan - The spectral band’s peak danger level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

amplitude at cursor position

Figure 6 - 4.Reviewing a Spectrum Collection Screen.

The Review Menu

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 5User Manual

Page 296: E-MANUAL

Pk Wrn - The spectral band’s peak alert level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Dan - The spectral band’s overall danger level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Wrn - The spectral band’s overall alert level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Band Pk - The spectral band’s current highest peak level.Updated for every new FFT data buffer.

Band Ov - The spectral band’s current overall level. Cal-culated using the following equation:

OA =

√ ∑ (Fi ) 2

i = low

high

√NBF

Where:

OA = overall level of vibrationlow = index of the band’s first FFT linehigh = index of the band’s last FFT lineFi = amplitude of each of the FFT linesNBF = noise bandwidth for window chosen

Noise Bandwidth:

Chosen Window NBFUniform 1.0Flat Top 3.782893Hanning 1.499512

The Review Menu

6 - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 297: E-MANUAL

Status - Displays alarm status as follows:

OvD - Overall danger. Shown when the overall level> = the overall danger limit.

PkD - Peak danger. Shown when the peak level > =the peak danger limit.

OvA - Overall alert. Shown when the overall level> = the overall alert limit.

PkA - Peak alert. Shown when the peak level> = the peak alert limit.

OK - No Alarms.

• Use the right or left arrow keys to view informa-tion for more than two bands.

Pressing < ENTER> again redisplays the DynamicData Point screen with the current overall value(THIS ) displayed for visual comparison with LAST .Alarms may be observed (ALARM1, ALARM2, orboth). Alarm markers are hollow if not exceeded,solid if exceeded.

• Press < ENTER> again to display the data pre-viously stored for the next POINT.

> To access the Dynamic Data Point screen’s Options:• Press the MENU key, the Options menu dis-

plays. • Make selections by positioning the pointer bar

with the up and down arrow keys and by press-ing < ENTER> .

The Review Menu

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 7User Manual

Page 298: E-MANUAL

Options are:

1:Skip Machine 5:User Note2:Skip Point 6:View Setup3:Previous Point 7:Delete Data4:Coded Notes

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 9 and 1 - 11 for descrip-tions of Options menu choices.

The Review Menu

6 - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 299: E-MANUAL

3-9-92 7:30 S.G.

7The Reports Menu

The Microlog can print reports and graphics directly to anIBM graphics compatible printer. A Model CMSS6160Printer Adapter plugged into the Microlog’s interface con-nector is required (Figure 7 - 1).

dani2.sld

¾ The printer adapter must be used. Con-necting a printer directly to the Micrologmay damage the printer and/or the Microlog.

The Reports function consists of three screens: the Re-ports menu, a Report Controls screen, and a Route Listscreen.

Printer

Model CMSS6160Printer Adapter

Microlog

Figure 7 - 1. Connecting the Microlog To a Printer.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 1User Manual

Page 300: E-MANUAL

The Reports Menu

> To access the Reports menu:• At the Microlog ’s main menu (Figure 7 - 2),

move the pointer bar to Reports and press< ENTER> .

screen20.pcx

¾ Before selecting a report from the Re-ports menu, you must open the SETs andPOINTs which are to appear in the re-port. See the section F1-Route List laterin this chapter.

• At the Reports menu (Figure 7 - 3), press a nu-meral on the Microlog’s keypad or move thepointer bar to your selection and press < ENTER> ; the report prints.

Figure 7 - 2.The Main Menu.

The Reports MenuThe Reports Menu

7 - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 301: E-MANUAL

ch11-02.pcx

The Report Controls Menu

> To access the Reports Controls menu:• At the Reports menu, press 8 or move pointer

bar to R8:eports Controls and press < EN-TER> . The Reports Controls screen appears(Figure 7 - 4).

Figure 7 - 3. The Reports Menu.

The Reports MenuThe Report Controls Menu

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 3User Manual

Page 302: E-MANUAL

726.pcx

Report Controls fields are:

Printer Type - Press MENU to view choices. Select theappropriate printer (Dot Matrix or HP Laser). Press< ENTER> . The pointer bar moves to the nextfield (Report Header).

¾ When disconnecting the Microlog from aHP Laser printer, the printer displays er-ror 22 message. Resetting the printer re-solves this problem.

Report Header - When the Report Controls screen firstdisplays, the Microlog is in unshifted mode.

alpha mode

Figure 7 - 4.The Report Controls Data Entry Field in Alpha Mode.

The Reports MenuThe Report Controls Menu

7 - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 303: E-MANUAL

• Press the SHIFT key to place the Microlog inshifted (alpha) mode before typing the reportheader text. The arrow in the top status line in-dicates when you are in shifted (alpha) mode.

• Use the keyboard to enter a header line of up to40 characters.

Threshold - A second field sets the FFT alarm thresh-old—in percent full scale—that causes peaks abovethe threshold to be reported.

• Enter the alarm threshold.• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the main menu

screen.

F1 - Route List/F2 - Print

Only POINTs that are in open SETs are included ingraphic and numeric reports.

> To open SETs to print:• Press F1 - Route List at the Reports menu (see

Figure 7 - 3). The Route List displays (Figure7 - 5).

The Reports MenuF1 - Route List/F2 - Print

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 5User Manual

Page 304: E-MANUAL

ch11-10.pcx

All Route List functions (as described in the chapterson Route, NonRoute, and Analyzer) are available atthis time, except the Take Data function.

• Move the pointer bar to the desired SET andpress the right arrow key to open the SET.

At this time a Dynamic Points Report for onePOINT can be printed.

• Move the pointer bar to a POINT in the RouteList and press F2 to print.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Reportsmenu.

Figure 7 - 5. A Route List.

The Reports MenuF1 - Route List/F2 - Print

7 - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 305: E-MANUAL

Sample Report Formats

Exceptions Report Figure 7 - 6 shows what an Exceptions Report looks like.An Exceptions Report lists all POINTs which exceedtheir alarm thresholds. (Alarm thresholds are set in thePRISM host software, not in the Report Controls/Thresh-old:.)

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 7User Manual

Page 306: E-MANUAL

ch11-13a.pcx

Figure 7 - 6.An Exceptions Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 307: E-MANUAL

The fields in the Exceptions Report are:

ID - Identifies the POINT where a measurement was re-corded.

Date - Date the measurement was recorded.

Units - Unit of measurement (English: IPS, Gs, MILS,

Volts. Metric: µM, mm/sec).

Value - Overall value of the measurement.

Alarm1 - Lower alarm level.

Alarm2 - Upper alarm level.

Alrm - shows which alarm is exceeded (A1 and/or A2).

End of Shift ReportFigure 7 - 7 shows what an End of Shift Report lookslike. This report lists all data collected since the last timethe Microlog was initialized.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 9User Manual

Page 308: E-MANUAL

ch11-14.pcx

Figure 7 - 7.An End of Shift Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 10 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 309: E-MANUAL

The fields in the End of Shift Report are:

¾ Refer to pages 7 - 8 for description ofEnd of Shift Report fields:

ID UnitsValue

Description - A brief description of the identified POINT.

Status - Indicates the type of data stored. Letters corre-sponding to stored data are:

O Overall ValueS FFT SpectrumN NotesP PhaseT Time Domain

Missed Points ReportFigure 7 - 8 shows what a Missed Points Report lookslike. This report lists the POINTs in a ROUTE for whichdata has not yet been collected.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 11User Manual

Page 310: E-MANUAL

ch11-15.pcx

The fields in the Missed Points Report are:

¾ Refer to page 7-9 for descriptions ofMissed Points Report fields:

ID Alarm1Description Alarm2

Last - Overall value of the previous measurement.

Dynamic Points ReportFigure 7 - 9 shows what the FFT spectrum report for aPOINT looks like. FFT spectrums can graph amplitude(magnitude), phase, and time.

Figure 7 - 8. A Printed Missed Points Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 12 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 311: E-MANUAL

rpt4.pcx

The fields in the Dynamic Points Report are:

ID - Identifies the POINT where a measurement was re-corded.

Description - A brief description of the POINT identified.

Figure 7 - 9.A Printed FFT Spectrum Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 13User Manual

Page 312: E-MANUAL

Full Scale - The maximum value for the spectrum’s ampli-tude scale.

Type - Acc, Vel, Disp, Pressure, Volts, Pressure.

Det - Method of detection (peak, RMS, or Pk to Pk).

Low Fq Lmt - The high pass filter frequency applied tothe input signal for the purpose of eliminating un-wanted low frequency noise. Same as Low Freq.Cutoff .

RPM - The nominal running speed of the machine fromwhich data was acquired.

Input Sens - Millivolts per engineering unit for the meas-urement pickup.

Alarm Type - Level, in window, out of window.

Alarm1 - Lower alarm level.

Alarm2 - Upper alarm level.

Freq Range - Range of the spectrum’s frequency scale.

Window - The type of window used in the FFT process-ing.

Date - Date and time data was collected.

Avg - The number of averages which were collected in thesample.

Lines - Determines the basic resolution of the spectrum.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 14 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 313: E-MANUAL

¾ An additional field (Average Type) is in-cluded for the Microlog. This field dis-plays the type of averaging the Micrologwas set to while data was collected.

Dynamic Points Report Including SpectralBanding InformationThe Microlog allows printing of Spectral Bands. This re-port prints the same information as a Dynamic Points Re-port with spectral bands displayed. A second page isprinted containing a Spectral Banding Summary. Thissummary displays the following information for each spec-tral band setup:

From (CPM) - The spectral band’s low frequency limit inCPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

To (CPM) - The spectral band’s high frequency limit inCPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Dan - The spectral band’s peak danger level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Wrn - The spectral band’s peak alert level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Dan - The spectral band’s overall danger level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Wrn - The spectral band’s overall alert level (alarmlimit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Band Pk - The spectral bands current highest peak level.Updated for every new FFT data buffer.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 15User Manual

Page 314: E-MANUAL

Band Ov - The spectral band’s current overall level. Cal-culated using the following equation:

OA =

√ ∑ (Fi ) 2

i = low

high

√NBF

Where:

OA = overall level of vibrationlow = index of the band’s first FFT linehigh = index of the band’s last FFT lineFi = amplitude of each of the FFT linesNBF = noise bandwidth for window chosen

Noise Bandwidth:

Chosen Window NBFUniform 1.0Flat Top 3.782893Hanning 1.499512

Status - Displays alarm status as follows:

OvD - Overall danger. Shown when the overall level > =the overall danger limit.

PkD - Peak danger. Shown when the peak level > = thepeak danger limit.

OvA - Overall alert. Shown when the overall level > =the overall alert limit.

PkA - Peak alert. Shown when the peak level > = thepeak alert limit.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 16 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 315: E-MANUAL

At the bottom of the spectrum report in Figure 7 - 9 aretwo tables. The first table, IDENTIFICATION OFSPECTRAL PEAKS ABOVE 0.012 IPS contains the fol-lowing fields:

¾ 0.012 is 2.5% of 0.5 (full scale). The2.5% is set in the Threshold field in theReport Controls screen.

NO. - Number of peaks listed. Up to a maximum of 16values.

AMP. - The amplitude at a peak.

DEG. - Number of degrees from the trigger.

FREQ. - Frequency of peaks above Threshold (0.012 inour example).

ORDER - Number of times running speed.

The second table, SPECTRAL ENERGY SUMMARY ,contains the following fields:

OVERALL - RMS summation of the spectral band.

SYNC (synchronous) - RMS summation of running speedand all integral multiples of running speed.

SUBSYNC (subsynchronous) - RMS summation of allcomponents below the first order.

NONSYNC (nonsynchronous) - RMS summation of allnon-integer order components above the first order.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 17User Manual

Page 316: E-MANUAL

Dynamic Points Report Including Phase Spec-trumPhase Spectrum - Figure 7 - 10 shows an example of thephase spectrum position of a Dynamic Points Report. Aphase spectrum graphs phase vs. frequency (or orders).The fields on the page containing the phase graph are thesame as the fields on the page containing the FFT graph.

¾ If your graph runs outside its display win-dow, set Auto Range:On in the Data Col-lection menu (see Chapter 8, Utilities)and re-print the report.

¾ Phase data is obtained by positioning thecursor at the rotational speed or its har-monics, and not at the peak components.

rpt5.pcx

Figure 7 - 10. A Phase Spectrum Graph.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 18 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 317: E-MANUAL

Dynamic Points Report Including FAM DataSummaryThe Microlog allows printing FAM information. This re-port prints the same information as a Dynamic Points Re-port . A second page is printed containing a FAM DATASUMMARY (Figure 7 - 11).

fam-3.pcx

This summary displays FAM information as defined inPRISM4.

Figure 7 - 11. The FAM DATA SUMMARY .

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 19User Manual

Page 318: E-MANUAL

Database Setup ReportFigure 7 - 12 shows the appearance of the Database SetupReport.

ch11-18.pcx

Figure 7 - 12. A Database Setup Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 20 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 319: E-MANUAL

The report lists each POINT in a SET or ROUTE and thePOINT’s setup data. See the Dynamic Points Report(above) for a description of the fields included in this re-port.

The Notes ReportFigure 7 - 12 shows what the Notes Report looks like.

ch11-20.pcx

Figure 7 - 13. A Notes Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 21User Manual

Page 320: E-MANUAL

The Notes Report lists each POINT for which a note wasentered at data collection time, and the note itself. This re-port has the same fields as the End of Shift Report.

Print TestFigure 7 - 14 shows the output of the print test.

ch11-21.pcx

This report is a test of the capabilities of the printer at-tached to your Microlog.

Figure 7 - 14. A Print Test Report.

The Reports MenuSample Report Formats

7 - 22 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 321: E-MANUAL

4-7-92 7:20 S.G

8The Utilities Menu

The Utilities menu (see Figure 8 - 1) permits assignmentof global measurement and communications parametersfor the Microlog. It also allows you to perform housekeep-ing and test functions.

801.pcx

Figure 8 - 1.The CMVA60 Microlog Utilities Menu.

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 1User Manual change 01

Page 322: E-MANUAL

Display Contrast

The Display Contrast function allows you to increase anddecrease contrast of the LCD display screen.

> To access the Display Contrast function:• In the Utilities menu, press 1 or move the

pointer bar to 1:Display Contrast and press< ENTER> . The Display Contrast screendisplays (Figure 8 - 2).

ch12-03.pcx

• Use the arrow keys on the keypad to adjust dis-play contrast.

The right arrow key increases contrast. The left ar-row key decreases contrast. Adjust the contrast so itbest suits your viewing angle and light level.

Figure 8 - 2. The Display Contrast Screen.

The Utilities MenuDisplay Contrast

8 - 2 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 323: E-MANUAL

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilitiesmenu.

Temp/Battery

This function displays the state of charge on the Micrologbattery and the Microlog’s internal temperature.

> To access the Temp/Battery function:• In the Utilities menu, press 2 or move the

pointer bar to 2:Temp/Battery and press < EN-TER> . The Temp/Battery screen displays(Figures 8-3).

battery.pcx

• Check the battery charge on the Battery Condi-tion meter.

Figure 8 - 3.The Microlog’s Temp/Battery Condition Display.

The Utilities MenuTemp/Battery

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 3User Manual change 01

Page 324: E-MANUAL

If the meter reads less than 75% of full charge, you shouldconsider charging the battery, or replacing the battery packin the Microlog with the spare battery pack from the sup-port module.

The graphic arrows on both the battery condition and oper-ating temperature displays indicate the values at whichwarning indicators are turned on to indicate abnormal con-ditions. The low battery charge indicator (BT) appears inthe top status line of the screen when battery charge leveldeclines to the first arrow (approximately 1/3 full scale).When the lower arrow is reached, the Microlog automat-ically shuts off to preserve data in memory.

If the Microlog automatically shuts off, you can either re-charge the internal battery pack or change to the spare bat-tery pack (all memory is automatically protected for about3 minutes by a small internal power source while batterypacks are exchanged) and immediately resume operatingthe Microlog.

Serial Number - Displays the Microlog’s serial number.

Before leaving the Temp/Battery display, note the elapsedtime indicator (ET= ). When you insert a fully chargedbattery, press the F1 key to reset ET to zero. This featuretracks the hours of battery life between charges.

• When you are satisfied and comfortable with thebattery charge and internal temperature displays,press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilitiesmenu.

The Utilities MenuTemp/Battery

8 - 4 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 325: E-MANUAL

Set Clock

Numeric keypad entries set the time and date.

¾ Alternatively, the PRISM software Trans-fer menu offers options for easily config-uring the connected Microlog’s internalsettings.

> To access the Set Clock function:• In the Utilities menu, press 3 or move the

pointer bar to 3:Set Clock and press < ENTER> . The Set Clock screen displays(Figure 8 - 4).

¾ Corrections to the time or date are easilymade using left and right arrow keys toshift the cursor (flashing space) to the nu-meral that is to be changed.

The Utilities MenuSet Clock

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 5User Manual change 01

Page 326: E-MANUAL

ch12-06.pcx

Set Clock screen fields are:

Time - Enter the correct time with the keypad numerals.When each field has been filled (hours, minutes, sec-onds), the cursor jumps to the next field.

Date - Press MENU to view the choices.

Both European date (Day/Month/Year) and Americandate (Month/Day/Year) conventions are available.

• Move the pointer bar to your selection and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thedate field.

• Enter the desired date with the keypad numer-als. When each field has been filled (month,day, year), the cursor jumps to the next field.

Figure 8 - 4. Setting Time and Date.

The Utilities MenuSet Clock

8 - 6 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 327: E-MANUAL

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilitiesmenu.

Communications

This function establishes the parameters for transferringdata between the Microlog and host computer by directconnection or by modem. These parameters must be thesame in both the Microlog and host computer software(such as PRISM host software).

> To access the Communications function:• In the Utilities menu, press 4 or move the

pointer bar to 4:Communications and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar displays atBaud.

Communications screen fields are:

Baud - Press MENU to view the choices (Figure 8 - 5).

The Utilities MenuCommunications

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 7User Manual change 01

Page 328: E-MANUAL

mlch8-44.pcx

¾ The baud rate determines the speed oftransmission; 38,400 baud transmits at38,400 bits per second (bps). Since itusually takes 10 bits to transmit one char-acter, 38,400 bps is a transmission rate ofapproximately 3,840 characters per sec-ond.

For serial communications with a host computer with-out a modem, the recommended baud rate is 38,400,but this value may be changed in both the Micrologand host computer.

• Move the pointer bar to the baud rate whichmatches that of the host (or the PRISM host soft-ware) and press < ENTER> . The pointer baradvances to the next field (Modem Mode).

Figure 8 - 5. The Communications Menu.

The Utilities MenuCommunications

8 - 8 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 329: E-MANUAL

Modem Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

None - Used for a direct, hard-wired connection be-tween the Microlog and host computer.

Originate - Used for modem connection between theMicrolog and host computer, where the Micrologoriginates the call by dialing the phone number en-tered below.

Auto Answer - Used for modem connection betweenthe Microlog and host computer. To make the con-nection, the PRISM host software originates the calland the Microlog automatically answers.

• Select Modem Mode with the pointer bar andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Phone #).

Microlog Remote - Set to Yes to enable the Microlog tocommunicate with PRISM4 Remote software.

Phone # - The Phone # dialing command line consists ofthe “attention” command (AT), the dial command(D), a dialing modifier: tone (T) or pulse (P), and aphone number. A sample dial command line is:

ATDT 555-1212

¾ A Hayes modem or Hayes compatibletype modem is recommended. See yourmodem user guide for information onhow to use your modem.

• Enter the Phone # dialing command line andpress < ENTER> .

Modem Setup (Optional) - Enter modem specific controlcommands.

The Utilities MenuCommunications

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 9User Manual change 01

Page 330: E-MANUAL

¾ Modem specific control commands arenot recommended, unless absolutely nec-essary.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilitiesmenu screen.

System Setup

The System Setup sets global parameters for units, auto-matic amplitude range, and sensor power supply.

> To access the System Setup menu:• In the Utilities menu, press 5 or move the

pointer bar to 5:System Setup and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar appears on thefirst field of the System Setup screen (FFTHz/CPM).

System Setup screen fields are:

FFT Hz/CPM - Press MENU to view the choices (Figure8 - 6).

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

8 - 10 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 331: E-MANUAL

804.pcx

• Select FFT frequency units with the pointer barand press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (FFT Lin/Log ).

FFT Lin/Log - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select your choice for default display mode andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (System).

System - Press MENU to view the choices.• Select English or Metric units with the pointer

bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (Auto Range). PressMENU to view the choices.

Auto Range - When Auto Range is on, the Microlog auto-matically scales the amplitude range to achieve an op-timum range for the input signal. The full scale

Figure 8 - 6.The System Setup Screen.

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 11User Manual change 01

Page 332: E-MANUAL

amplitude range may be increased manually in multi-ples of 2 during data collection by pressing the up ar-row key. Pressing the down arrow key decreases thefull scale amplitude range by multiples of 0.5.

¾ When printing a Dynamic Points Re-port , if the graph runs outside its displaywindow, set Auto Range:On in the Sys-tem Setup menu and re-print the report.Auto Range:On also autoranges the dis-plays in Review even if data was collectedwith autoranging off.

• Select Auto Range off or on with the pointerbar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (User Mode).

User Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

Normal - In Analyzer mode, this selection reducesthe choices displayed to only those four needed forroutine machinery diagnosis (Figure 8 - 7).

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

8 - 12 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 333: E-MANUAL

ch12-27.pcx

Analysis - This selection gives you access to the fullrange of seven choices provided in the Microlog (Fig-ure 8 - 8).

Figure 8 - 7.The Analyzer Menu Which Displays When

User Mode:Normal Is Selected.

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 13User Manual change 01

Page 334: E-MANUAL

ch12-26.pcx

¾ In Analysis mode, it is possible to estab-lish trigger parameters requiring an exter-nal input, then shift to the Normal modewhere these selections are not visible.

• Select User Mode with the pointer bar andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Data Storage).

Data Storage - Press MENU to view the choices.

Normal - Data stored in Normal mode retains full 16bit amplitude resolution.

Compressed - Data stored in Compressed mode en-ables storing almost twice the data at a slight penaltyin amplitude resolution (no more than 4%, typicallyless than 1%).

Figure 8 - 8.The Analyzer menu Which Displays When

User Mode: Analysis Is Selected

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

8 - 14 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 335: E-MANUAL

• Select Data Storage with the pointer bar andpress <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Sensor Mode).

Sensor Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

Normal - Used to maximize battery life. Power tothe signal conditioning circuitry is turned on onlywhen making an overall or FFT measurement, whenthe Battery/Temperature screen is displayed, andwhen in Transfer mode.

Always On - Used to keep a sensor with a largepower-on transient and/or a long settling time ener-gized continuously during a ROUTE. Always On isrecommended when making dynamic measurementsbelow 5 Hz. Although this takes more battery volt-age, it shortens the time to take a measurement be-cause there is no need for settling time.

• Select Sensor Mode with the pointer bar andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Connector).

Connector - Press MENU to view the choices.

INPUT - Accepts dynamic and process inputs usingoff the shelf interfaces such as ultrasonic detectors. Itcan be selected in the Utilities/System Setup menuas either ICP, External, or Charge Amp.

ICP - Selected when a sensor which requires 24V dc/2.2 mA is attached to the INPUT.

¾ INPUT BNC must be set to the ICP op-tion to power any sensor connected to theINPUT BNC (which requires 24 Vdc/2.2 mA).

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 15User Manual change 01

Page 336: E-MANUAL

External - Select when taking measurements outof “Buffered” outputs like those on permanentlymounted rack systems, process signals, or from asingal generator.

Charge Amp - Select when a “Charge Mode”Accelerometer (pC/g) is attached.

PHASE - Accepts and conditions tachometer inputs suchas; Eddy Probes, laser tachometers, optical tachome-ters, etc.

OUTPUT - Provides a buffered replica of the input signalfor recording, headphones, or further external signalprocessing. It is important to note that depending onthe size of the signal and the gain selected, the outputmay be 1/10 the amplitude of the input.

¾ If Connector:BNC is selected, a newfield appears in the System Setup menu.

• Select Connector with the pointer bar and press< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to thenext field (Sensor Power).

Sensor Power - This field diplays only if Connector:BNCis selected. Press MENU to view choices.• Select Sensor Power with the pointer bar and

press <ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Settling Mode).

Settling Mode - Press MENU to view choices.

Off - Data collection is delayed for 2.5 seconds.

Conservative - Performs a detailed scan of the inputfor DC offset, to determine whether data is good.Scanning takes longer with this selection.

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

8 - 16 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 337: E-MANUAL

Aggressive - Performs a less detailed scan of the in-put for DC offset to determine whether data is good.Scan speed is faster than the above option.

Select Settling Mode and press <ENTER> . Thepointer bar advances to the next field (Sensor/CableCheck).

Sensor/Cable Check - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select Yes to have the Microlog automaticallycheck for a defective sensor or its associated ca-ble upon unit power-up. During unit power-up,the Cable/Sensor Status screen displays (Fig-ure 8- 9).

¾ When conducting the cable/sensor checkon a multi-pin connector, a temporaryadapter (P/N ########) must be used be-tween the Microlog and the cable/sensorassembly being tested. This cable/sesnoradapter is not necessary when checkingthe Triax Accelerometer Sensor cable.

¾ Caution: Do not use the cable/sensoradapter with the temperature gun cableassembly. Equipment may be damaged.

The Utilities MenuSystem Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 17User Manual change 01

Page 338: E-MANUAL

f ig8-9.pcx

Verify the BOV condition is correct and press < ESCAPE> to enter the ROUTE.

The Microlog looks for a voltage range of 8 VDC to 16VDC as an acceptable bias voltage range.

• Press < ENTER> .• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities

menu.

Route Setup

The Route Setup menu sets global parameters forROUTE collection.

> To access the Route Setup menu:• In the Utilities menu, press 6 or move the

pointer bar to 6:Route Setup and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar appears on the

Figure 8 - 9.The Cable/Sensor Status Screen.

The Utilities MenuRoute Setup

8 - 18 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 339: E-MANUAL

first field of the Route Setup screen (RouteMode).

811.pcx

Route Setup screen fields are:

Route Mode - Used to save time during data collection.Press MENU to view the choices (Figure 8 - 10).

Normal - Pressing < ENTER> when in an FFTspectrum display during data collection causes the Microlog to return to the current POINT’s overallmeasurement display so you may visually confirm thedata collected and record observation notes. Pressing< ENTER> a second time advances the Microlog tothe next POINT.

Auto - When set to Auto, pressing the < ENTER>key from the FFT spectrum display automatically ad-vances the Microlog to the next measurement POINTwithout additional keystrokes. In this mode, notesshould be recorded before the data is collected.

Figure 8 - 10. The Route Setup Screen.

The Utilities MenuRoute Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 19User Manual change 01

Page 340: E-MANUAL

• Select Route Mode with the pointer bar andpress < ENTER> . The pointer bar advancesto the next field (Route Spectrum).

Route Spectrum - Used to save time during data collec-tion. Press MENU to view the choices.

Show - Displays the FFT spectrum during ROUTEdata collection.

Hide - Only the overall bar graph displays. The FFTspectrum does not display.

In either mode an FFT spectrum is recorded when re-quired.

• Select Route Spectrum with the pointer barand press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (Route Trigger Slope).

Route Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view the choices.When collecting data in a ROUTE which requires atrigger, you must correctly set this field.• Select Route Trigger Slope with the pointer bar

and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-vances to the next field (Route Collection).

Route Collection - Used to save time during data collec-tion. Press MENU to view the choices.

Normal - The display is updated by each FFT aver-age.

Fast - Minimizes the time required to collect an aver-aged FFT spectrum by updating the display only afterthe requested number of averages have been calcu-lated.

• Select Route Collection with the pointer barand press < ENTER> . The pointer advancesto the next field on the screen (Average Over-lap).

The Utilities MenuRoute Setup

8 - 20 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 341: E-MANUAL

Average Overlap - Overlap processing is advantageouswhen the time required to gather a time record ismuch longer than the time needed to calculate anFFT spectrum. In the Microlog this occurs at fre-quencies below 1,000 Hz (60,000 CPM).

For lower frequencies, the amount of overlap can beincreased to reduce the time required to collect agiven number of averages. Recognize, however, thatthe greater the overlap, the more information sharedbetween averages. Press MENU to view choices.

Max - Uses whatever data is in the time record at thetime. This can be existing data, new data, or a mix-ture depending on how long it takes to collect time re-cord data. Results in the shortest averaging time butmay lack statistical accuracy.

75% - Uses 75% of existing data and 25% of newdata to calculate new FFT.

50% - Uses 50% of existing data and 50% of newdata to calculate new FFT.

None - Each spectrum ensemble is new data added tothe sum.

Overlap processing is used to obtain enough new en-semble data for an accurate average. If the maximumfrequency is low and the FFT process time is fast, theaverage sum would include a high percent of old datawith maximum overlap. Below 2 kHz, 50% overlapand six averages is a reasonable ROUTE setup.

• Select your choice for Average Overlap withthe pointer bar and press <ENTER> .

¾ To enable Operator ID tagging, youmust Clear the Microlog before down-loading a ROUTE to the Microlog.

The Utilities MenuRoute Setup

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 21User Manual change 01

Page 342: E-MANUAL

Operator ID Tagging - A set of 100 (maximum) OperatorIds and 50 (maximum) Microlog serial numbers maybe downloaded to the Microlog. If set to Yes, eachtime the ROUTE screen is entered, the Micrologdiplays the list of downloaded operators. The user se-lects his or her Operator Id and Microlog serial nu-mer (which the Microlog uses to tag every datavalue).

• Select Yes to tag each data point with an Opera-tor ID and Microlog Serial Number and press< ENTER> . The pointer advances to the nextfield (Route Display).

Route Display - Press MENU to view choices.

Point Only - Allows the operator to move the pointerbar from POINT to POINT (bypassing SETs and ma-chines) within a ROUTE hierarchy list. Press theUp/Down arrow to move to the next or previousPOINT in the Route display.

Hierarchy - (default) Moves the pointer bar to everyitem within a Route hierarchy list.• Select your choice for Route Display and press

< ENTER> . The pointer advances to the nextfield (View MPA Spectrum).

The Utilities MenuRoute Setup

8 - 22 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 343: E-MANUAL

View MPA Spectrum - Press MENU to view options(Figure 8-11).

f ig8-11.pcx

Select whether to display the MPA ROUTE spectrum for1st, Last, All , or No POINTs.

The Microlog displays the corresponding spectrum (includ-ing any FAM or spectral band information) allowing theoperator to inspect and verify that the data is correct.Press SAVE to continue collecting data for the remainingMPA POINTs or press <ESCAPE> to cancel data collec-tion.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilitiesmenu.

Memory Test

¾ When this option is selected, the follow-ing message displays:

For service mode only

Figure 8 - 11. The Route Setup Screen.

The Utilities MenuMemory Test

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 23User Manual change 01

Page 344: E-MANUAL

Initialize

Initialize deletes all ROUTEs, ROUTE POINTs, and Non-Route POINTs stored within the Microlog. There are threeinitialization modes:

Mode 1 - When PROMs are changed, a two-key initializa-tion must be performed before using the Micrologagain. The two-key initialization is accomplished bysimultaneously holding down both numeral keys 9and 6 while turning the Microlog on. This process(called Format) erases all stored data and initializesthe Microlog’s menus, setup screens, and parametersto factory default settings.

¾ To verify that your Microlog has been in-itialized properly, here is a technique wesuggest you use.

Before initializing, go to the 8:Utili-ties/5:System Setup screen and set AutoRange:On. Initialize as described abovethen go back to the 8:Utilities/5:SystemSetup screen. If you see AutoRange:Off, you have successfully initial-ized.

Mode 2 - The Microlog may also be initialized from theUtilities menu. This method of initialization erasesdata, but does not affect existing screen setups.• At the Utilities menu, press 8 or move the

pointer bar to 8:Initialize and press < ENTER> . A PASSWORD pop-up windowappears (Figure 8 - 12).

The Utilities MenuInitialize

8 - 24 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 345: E-MANUAL

ch12-24.pcx

• Key in the password and press < ENTER> .The Microlog erases all POINT data. It alsoerases the optional downloadable balancing pro-gram.

¾ The password may be set using the4:Communications option in the Utilitiesmenu.

• Place the pointer bar on Baud and press F2. Apop-up window appears titled, OLD PASS-WORD.

• Key in the old password and press < ENTER> . The window changes to NEW PASSWORD.

• Key in the new password.

Figure 8 - 12. A Password Pop-Up Window.

The Utilities MenuInitialize

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 25User Manual change 01

Page 346: E-MANUAL

Remember, a two-key initialization erases all POINTdata and initializes all the Microlog’s screen setups totheir default parameters.

Mode 3 - The Microlog may also be initialized from amenu selection in your PRISM host software in thehost computer. Clear erases all POINTs. Reseterases all POINT data. Neither Clear nor Reset af-fects the Microlog’s screen setups.

Flash Utilities

¾ When this option is selected, the follow-ing message displays:

For service mode only

The Utilities MenuFlash Utilities

8 - 26 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 347: E-MANUAL

3-09-92 8:20 S.G.

Appendix ABattery Capacity, Care, and

Testing

Changing Batteries

The main battery pack in the Microlog collector can bechanged at any time without the loss of data, however, us-ers are advised to change batteries following upload orprint-out whenever possible to avoid any problems due to alow or discharged battery.

A low or failed back-up power source will be observed asa loss in the date or time and sometimes the substitution ofcharacters for numerals following a main battery change.When these symptoms are observed, data and instructionsin memory are likely scrambled or lost.

After a battery change, the date and time should always beobserved for symptoms of a low or failed back-up powersource. If a low or discharged back-up power source issuspected, reset the Microlog.

> To reset the Microlog:• Hold down the Microlog’s 9 and 6 key.• While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, turn the

Microlog on.

¾ Resetting the Microlog deletes allPOINTs.

Consult your local Service Center for repairing the back-up power.

CMVA60 Microlog A - 1User Manual

Page 348: E-MANUAL

Battery Life

¾ Battery life is strongly influenced by a va-riety of factors (for example, temperature,battery age, sensor type, backlight us-age,etc.).

¾ SKF Condition Monitoring tests onCMVA60 units in the ROUTE mode haverecorded battery life in excess of 8 hoursfor NiMH batteries. These tests were per-formed with Sensor Power:Normal,which is the default and suggested methodof data collection for the CMVA60.

Battery Charging

The CMVA6112 Support Module is designed for use withNiMH (Nickel/Metal Hydride) Battery Packs(CMVA50230-1). We recommend the following proce-dures to obtain the most battery life from your battery.

The CMVA6112 Support Module is capable of chargingtwo battery packs simultaneously, one in the Support Mod-ule, and one in the Microlog connected to the SupportModule. To this purpose, the 6112 Support Module fea-tures two LEDs:

Battery in Charger LED - Indicates the status of the Bat-tery Pack in the 6112 Support Module.

Battery in Microlog LED - Indicates the status of the Bat-tery Pack in the Microlog connected to the 6112 Sup-port Module.

Battery Capacity, Care, and TestingBattery Life

A - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 349: E-MANUAL

¾ Deep discharging only occurs in the Sup-port Module. The Microlog cannot deepdischarge its Battery Pack (through thesupport module).

Upon receiving your new NiMH Battery Pack, you shoulddeep discharge and fully re-charge your Battery Pack aminimum of three times to “ teach” your NiMH BatteryPack its full charge potential. After deep discharging andre-charging three times, the NiMH Battery Pack obtainsits maximum battery life and no longer requires deep dis-charging prior to re-charging (as NiMH batteries do not de-velop a “memory").

> To deep discharge, then fully re-charge your NiMH Bat-tery Pack:

• Place the NiMH Battery Pack in the powered on6112 Support Module.

¾ It may take 1-2 minutes for the LED tolight, depending on the battery’s residualcharge. If the LED does not light within5 minutes, the Battery Pack is defective.

• Press the 6112 Support Module’s black DeepDischarge button. The 6112 Battery in ChargerLED begins a “slow flash” (1 flash per second)as the NiMH battery deep discharges.

• When deep discharging is complete, the Batteryin Charger LED stops flashing and assumes a“constant on” status (the LED remains lit with-out flashing). This indicates that the BatteryPack is fast-charging.

• As the battery nears its full charge capacity, theLED changes from a “constant on” status to a“ fast flash” . This indicates the Battery Pack istrickle charging.

Battery Capacity, Care, and TestingBattery Charging

CMVA60 Microlog A - 3User Manual

Page 350: E-MANUAL

If necessary, you may remove the battery when the LEDchanges from a “constant on” to a “ fast flash” . However,to ensure the battery is charged to its full charge potential,you should leave the Battery Pack on a trickle charge for atleast two hours before removing the Battery Pack from the6112 Support Module.

• Perform the deep discharging/re-charging proce-dure described for the NiMH Battery Pack threeconsecutive times.

> To re-charge your NiMH Battery Pack (after 3 deep dis-charge/re-charges):

• Place the NiMH Battery Pack in the powered on6112 Support Module or in a Microlog attachedto the powered on Support Module. The appro-priate LED changes to a “constant on” status in-dicating the Battery Pack is fast charging.

¾ It may take 1-2 minutes for the LED tolight, depending on the battery’s residualcharge. If the LED does not light within5 minutes, the Battery Pack is defective.

¾ If the Battery Pack has a high residualcharge, the appropriate LED may go di-rectly to a “ fast flash” and skip the “con-stant on” status. In this case, the 6112Support Module has determined that theBattery Pack only requires a tricklecharge to bring it to full charge capacity.Allow the Battery Pack to trickle chargefor at least two hours before removing itfrom the Support Module.

Battery Capacity, Care, and TestingBattery Charging

A - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 351: E-MANUAL

• As the battery nears its full charge capacity, theLED changes from a “constant on” status to a“ fast flash” . This indicates the Battery Pack istrickle charging.

• If necessary, you may remove the battery whenthe LED changes from a “constant on” to a“ fast flash” . However, to ensure the battery ischarged to its full charge potential, you shouldleave the Battery Pack on a trickle charge for atleast two hours before removing the BatteryPack from the 6112 Support Module.

Unintentional Discharge

The 6112 Support Module immediately proceeds to dis-charge its Battery Pack when power is removed from the6112. To avoid this inadvertent discharge, remove the Bat-tery Pack from the Support Module before removingpower from the Support Module.

Aborting Deep Discharge

> To abort a deep discharge:• Remove the Battery Pack from the 6112 Support

Module, then reinsert the Battery Pack in theSupport Module, or

• Remove power from the 6112 Support Module,then re-apply power to the Support Module.

Battery Capacity, Care, and TestingUnintentional Discharge

CMVA60 Microlog A - 5User Manual

Page 352: E-MANUAL

Thermal Switch - NiMH Battery Pack

The NiMH Battery Pack (CMVA50230-1) is equippedwith a Thermal Switch that disables the battery pack attemperatures exceeding 120o Fahrenheit (49o Celsius).

• Do not operate the Microlog in temperatures ex-ceeding 120o F (49o C).

• Do not store the Microlog in temperatures ex-ceeding 120o F (49o C).

• Do not charge the Microlog in temperatures ex-ceeding 110o F (43o C) (charging increases theBattery Pack’s internal temperature by approxi-mately 10o F).

> If the Battery Pack Thermal Switch opens as a resultof excessive temperature:

• Place the Microlog and Battery Pack in a coolerenvironment, and wait for the Battery Pack’s in-ternal temperature to cool.

• Once cooled, insert the Battery Pack in the Mi-crolog (if necessary) and power on. If the Mi-crolog powers up normally, the Battery Packswitch has closed and the Battery Pack/Mi-crolog are ready for use.

Battery Capacity, Care, and TestingThermal Switch - NiMH Battery Pack

A - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 353: E-MANUAL

03-6-92 11:45

Appendix BSpecifications

Specifications for CMVA60

SOURCE

Vibration Sensors: Acceleration (or veloc-ity), handheld or attached with magnet orquick connect. Nominal 2.2 mA currentsource available from input. Compatiblewith integral electronic piezoelectric acceler-ometers. Open circuit voltage is + 24 voltsnominal.

SEE Sensor: CMSS786M SEE sensor 0-250 SEE range.

AC/DC Current Sensor:

High Temperature Pressure Sensor:

Temperature Sensors: Measurement range-580° to 2,102°F (-500° to 1,150°C).

From Installed Monitoring System: Accel-eration, velocity, displacement from noncon-tact probes, speed, phase temperature orany process parameter.

Keyboard Entry: Measurements read fromindicators or installed instruments enteredin engineering units. Maximum of eight (8)places including sign (+ or -) and decimalpoint.

Universal Tachometer Input: Accepts

pulse inputs up to ±25 V.

AC and DC Volts: From any Source. SeeInput Voltage Range.

Non-Measurement Observations: Addedto measurement as coded notes or in plainlanguage to a total of 32 characters permeasurement point.

PRE-PROCESSING

Hardware Enveloper: With four (4) select-able input filters for enhanced bearing andgearmesh fault detection.

Filter selection: 5 Hz-100 Hz, 50Hz-1,000Hz, 500Hz-10 kHz, 5Hz-40 kHz.

INPUT PARAMETERS

Tachometer: Minimum pulse amplitude 2volt peak to peak, minimum 0.1 ms pulsewidth, and conditioning circuitry.

Input Impedance: 1 Meg Ohm.

Input Coupling : Low frequency 3 dB rolloff at 1.0 Hz.

Input Voltage Range: AC ±25 V peak,

DC ±50 V.

Dynamic Range: 80 dB (14 bit signal con-version) plus 60 dB of gain ranging for a to-tal signal input range of 140 dB.

Amplitude: Accuracy within 1% input atone specified frequency.

Input Connectors: BNC (3) input, outputand tachometer/phase. Multi-pin D connec-tor supports all previous generation Mi-crolog cables.

CMVA60 Microlog B - 1User Manual

Page 354: E-MANUAL

Data Displays: Single or dual split screen. Magnitude,time, and phase. Tracking filter (1X and 2X).Amplitude vs. crank angle.Motor current analysis (zoomed and envel-oped).Up to 12 bands (fixed or order based).

DATA PROCESSING AND STORAGE

Microprocessor: Intel, 32 bit 25 MHz mi-croprocessor.

Memory: 6 Mb (Flash 4 Mb).

MEASUREMENT

Range: 0.5 Hz to 20 kHz (continuously ad-justable).

Averaging- Programmable from 1 to 9,999.Type: Average, peak hold, synchronoustime, and off.Mode: Continuous, finite, and repeat.

Markers : Fixed and cursor lock. Har-monic, Relative, and Sideband.

Trigger Modes: Amplitude trigger thresh-olds, trigger slope, and pre- and post-trig-ger time delays are fully programmable.Free run, external, and input.

FFT Analysis:Start Frequency: Preprogrammed between1 and the maximum frequency.Maximum Frequency: Selected between 1Hz and 20 kHz.Resolution: Programmable 100, 200, 400,800, 1600, 3200, and 6400 lines.Frequency Accuracy: 0.01% of the fre-quency measured at the position of the dis-play cursor.Measurement Windows: Hanning, Uni-form, and Flat Top.

Multi-Parameter Route Collection: Up to12 points can be linked for one button pushautomation.

Communication: 1200, 2400, 4800,9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115,520baud rates.

Power: Removable NiMH battery packs -8 hours life.

Keyboard: Sealed chemical resistant sili-con rubber, tactile touch.Dedicated Keys For Analysis: Markerson/off, freeze display, zoom in/out, savedata, display expand, set RPM (running fre-quency index for orders), reset measure-ment, LIN/LOG shift cursor.Hot Keys: Find peak, find last route pointmeasured, overall and cursor values, andmotor current fault criteria.

LCD Screen: One button activated back-light, 5,000" (127mm) x 4.375 (111mm)with disposable screen guards.

Case: High impact injection molded withIP54 dust and splash rating.

PRINTING

Direct to LaserJet or Dot Matrix, 8-1/2" x11" and A4 metric formats.

APPLICATION RESIDENT PRO-GRAMS

Single and Two Plane Balancing.Tracking Filter: 1X and 2X.Motor Current Monitoring: Rotor fault crite-ria.Cyclic Measurement: Amplitude vs. crankangle (reciprocating) and punch and presscycles.

PHYSICAL DATA

Size: 7.88" (W) x 10.50" (H) x 2.50" (D) [200mm (W) x 267mm (H) x 64mm (D)]

Weight: 5 pounds (2.3 kg)

SpecificationsSpecifications for CMVA60

B - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 355: E-MANUAL

ENVIRONMENTAL

IP Rating: IP64

Temperature Range:

Storage: -10°to 60° C. (14° to 140° F.)

Operational: -10° to 50° C. (14° to 122° F.)

Humidity : 95% Non-Condensing

ORDERING INFORMATION

CMVA60-K

CMVA60 Microlog Data Collector/Ana-lyzer, Single Channel

CMVA6112 Microlog Support Module

CMVA50230-1 Battery Pack, NiMH (Spare)

CMVA3355 AC/DC Adapter, Universal115V/230V

CMVA3351 Cable Power Cord ForCMVA3355 UL110

CMVA6131 Microlog Carrying Case, Ny-lon, Black

CMSS50077A Cable, Microlog to SupportModule, 4 feet

CMSS50080 Cable, Support Module to PC,4 feet

CMSS250 25 Pin to 9 Pin Adapter, SupportModule to PC

CMVA60M User Manual, Microlog

CMSS50079 Cable Microlog to BNC (NoPower) 5 feet

CMSS3073 Adapter, BNC to Banana Plugs

CMSS787A Accelerometer

CMSS31476400 Cable Microlog toCMSS787A Accelerometer

CMSS60139-04 Stinger Accelerometer Tip4.5 inches

CMSS908-MD Magnetic Base, Accelerome-ter, 1 1/2 inches

CMSSAD-BLANK Stainless Discs (QuickDisconnect) (10 Discs, 1 pack)

31641400 Installation & Implementation ofPortable Condition Monitoring Programs

CM-F0072S Machinery Data Sheets (25Sheets)

CM-F0077 Literature, Using MachineryData Sheets

CMVA60-K-CE (European CommunityApproved)

CMVA60 Microlog Data Collector/Ana-lyzer, Single Channel

CMVA6112-CE Microlog Support Module

CMVA50230-1 Battery Pack, NiMH (Spare)

CMVA3355 AC/DC Adapter, Universal115V/230V

CMVA3351 Cable Power Cord ForCMVA3355 UL110

CMVA6131 Microlog Carrying Case, Ny-lon, Black

CMSS50077A-CE Cable, Microlog to Sup-port Module, 4 feet

CMSS50080-CE Cable, Support Module toPC, 4 feet

CMVAManual User Manual, Microlog

SpecificationsSpecifications for CMVA60

CMVA60 Microlog B - 3User Manual

Page 356: E-MANUAL

CMSS50079-CE Cable Microlog to BNC(No Power) 5 feet

CMSS787A Accelerometer

CMSS31476400-CE Cable Microlog toCMSS787A Accelerometer

CMSS60139-04 Stinger Accelerometer Tip4.5 inches

CMSS908-MD Magnetic Base, Accelerome-ter, 1 1/2 inches

CMSSAD-BLANK Stainless Discs (QuickDisconnect) (10 Discs, 1 pack)

31641400 Installation & Implementation ofPortable Condition Monitoring Programs

CM-F0072S Machinery Data Sheets (25Sheets)

CM-F0077 Literature, Using MachineryData Sheets

ACCESSORIES

CMSS6160 Printer Adapter

CMSS6155K-0 (115V) CMSS6155K-1(230V) Optical Phase Reference Kits

CMSS6195K-0 (115V) CMSS6195K-1(230V) Laser Phase Reference Kits

CMSS6156 Magnetic holder forCMSS6155 AND CMSS6195 Phase Kits

CMSS6165K-0 (115V) CMSS6165K-1(230V) Strobe-Lite Kits

CMSS6186K Infrared Temperature Probe

CMSS6187 Current Clamp Probe

CMSS6190 Audio Headphones

CMSS6188K High Temperature Acceler-ometer Kit

CMSS793K Low Frequency AccelerometerKit

Although care has been taken to assure theaccuracy of the data compiled in the abovespecifications, SKF does not assume any li-ability for errors or omissions. SKF re-serves the right to alter any part of theabove specifications without prior notice.

SpecificationsSpecifications for CMVA60

B - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 357: E-MANUAL

12-13-91 10:20 S.G.

Appendix CWhy Zoom?

FFT frequency zoom narrows the analysis display intervaland increases frequency resolution. If there are closelyspaced peaks in a spectrum, increasing the number of FFTlines by depressing the front panel zoom key allows you toseparate the peaks, thereby achieving both amplitude accu-racy and improved frequency definition. Each ZOOM INkey press doubles the line resolution and halves the displayinterval. The resolution can only be increased to the 6400line limit of the single-channel Microlog and to 3200 linesin the two-channel Microlog. ZOOM OUT doubles thedisplay interval and halves the line resolution.

The Microlog uses a nondestructive method of applyingzoom. After the signals have been averaged and displayedwithin the restricted frequency interval, the spectral com-ponents outside the zoom display can be viewed by movingthe cursor to the display edge. Other spectrum sectors aredisplayed without performing new measurements.

The Microlog automatically sets the appropriate zoomrange whenever the fstart to fmax range is entered as lessthan 1/2 of the maximum frequency.

For example, if;

fstart = 500 Hz, fmax = 1 kHz, and Lines of resolu-tion = 400,

in order to provide the required 400-line resolution be-tween fstart and fmax, the Microlog automatically selects800 lines as the fzero to fmax resolution.

CMVA60 Microlog C - 1User Manual

Page 358: E-MANUAL

If;

fstart = 750 Hz, fmax = 1000, and Lines = 400,

the Microlog automatically selects 1600 lines. Underthese circumstances, the display cannot be changed toview spectral components outside the fstart to fmax displayrange.

Zoom is often required to separate sideband peaks about amajor peak. The sideband frequency difference allowsyou to identify the modulation shaft frequency associatedwith the vibration peak.

Another application of zoom is to increase the time do-main display so repetitive transients can be viewed in thetime display. The time display for Lines = 400 and fmax

= 1 kHz is 0.4 sec. Increasing the resolution to 6400lines changes the time display range to 4.8 seconds.

Why Zoom?

C - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 359: E-MANUAL

Appendix DMulti-pin Input Pinouts

Pinout Diagram

Model CMVA60 RS232 D Connector PinoutPin Description

01 Chassis Ground02 Transmit03 Receive04 STB (Strobe interrupt for Printer)05 BF (Trigger input from CMSS6135D)06 Connected to 19 (Battery recharge input)07 Ground08 D I/O 009 D I/O 110 D I/O 211 D I/O 3 12 D I/O 4 Parallel I/O Port13 D I/O 514 D I/O 615 D I/O 716 -5S2 (-5 Volt power supply from Signal Processing

Boards) 17 + 5S2 (+ 5 Volt power supply from Signal Processing

Boards) 18 + 5S1 (+ 5 Volt power supply from Digital Processing

Board) 19 Connected to 06 (Battery Recharge Input) 20 Signal Ground21 DC/Process Input/"SEE" Low22 AC/Dynamic Input23 + 24V/2.2mA (ICP power supply) 24 Charge Amp Input/ "SEE" High25 < Reserved>

CMVA60 Microlog D - 1User Manual

Page 360: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Multi-pin Input PinoutsPinout Diagram

D - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 361: E-MANUAL

Appendix ERemote Communications

Overview

Remote upload/download procedures are accomplished us-ing a modem link between PRISM4 Remote and the Microlog.

For successful remote communications, you must pre-setparameters on the Microlog and in the PRISM4 Remotesoftware. Standard setups for each of these are discussedbelow.

Preference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

To set up PRISM4 Remote communications:• In the Windows Program Manager window,

double-click the PRISM4 Solutions group iconto open the group window.

• In the group window, double-click the P4Re-mote program icon to run PRISM4 Remote.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 1User Manual

Page 362: E-MANUAL

System PreferencesSet tings.pcx

• In PRISM4 Remote’s main window, select theSettings menu’s System option. The SystemPreferences dialog box displays.

sys-pref.pcx

Figure E - 1. The Settings Menu.

Figure E - 2.The System Preferences Dialog Box.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

E - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 363: E-MANUAL

System Preferences options are:

PRISM4 Program Dir

Enter the complete directory path of the directory contain-ing your PRISM4 program.

¾ The Directory PATH setting is used to locatePRISM4 users and is necessary to createupload log files.

Unit System• Select Metric or English.

Freq. Scale• Select Hz or CPM.• Click the check mark command button to exit

the System Preferences dialog box and save thesettings.

¾ If the PRISM4 program directory containsmore than one user, a user list displaysnames from which to choose. The selecteduser name displays on the title bar.

Communication Preferences• Select the Settings menu’s Communication op-

tion.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

CMVA60 Microlog E - 3User Manual

Page 364: E-MANUAL

comm.pcx

Modem Mode• Set the Modem Mode option to Auto Answer

(default mode).

Modem Setup• Set the Modem Setup option to Factory de-

fault (recommended mode) or Stored profile.

¾ If Stored profile is selected, you may entermodem specific commands in the ModemSetup String field to customize your mo-dem. PRISM4 Remote saves these com-mands to the modem memory and sets upthe modem using the stored profile com-mands.

Com Port• Set the Com Port option to the com port to

which the modem is connected.

Figure E - 3.The Communication Preferences Dialog Box.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

E - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 365: E-MANUAL

Baud Rate• Set the Baud rate.

¾ If you are using “voice quality” telephonelines, baud rates of 4800 or lower are themost successful. Voice quality lines may oc-casionally handle higher baud rates depend-ing on the time of day and how “clean” thephone line. If you are using “data quality”telephone lines, baud rates of 9600 orhigher are successful.

Data Bits / Parity / Stop Bits• Set the Data Bits, Parity , and Stop Bits set-

tings to their default values (8, none, 1).• Click the check mark command button to exit

the Communication Preferences dialog boxand save the settings.

Password Setup• Select the Settings menu’s Password option.

The Password Setup dialog box displays.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

CMVA60 Microlog E - 5User Manual

Page 366: E-MANUAL

passstup.pcx

The Password Setup dialog box always indicates the de-fault REMOTE password, and the default PRISM4 data di-rectory “P4DATA” branching from PRISM4 Remotesprogram directory.

Each user password is associated with specific databasesvia the databases directory paths. A remote Microlog useris allowed access only to those databases which are associ-ated to their password.

¾ The user password cannot contain spaces.

Password - adding a new user password:• In the Password Setup dialog box, click the +

button to add a new user password. The AddPassword dialog box displays.

Figure E - 4.The Password Setup Dialog Box.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

E - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 367: E-MANUAL

addpass.pcx

Add Password options are:

Data Directory - Enter the PRISM4 database direc-tory path in which to associate the user password.

Password - Enter the new user password.

¾ If you wish to allow everyone access to alldatabases, set up a blank password for eachdatabase.

• Click the check mark button to exit the AddPassword dialog box and save the changes.

Password - editing an existing password:• In the Password Setup dialog box, click the

Edit button, the Edit Password dialog box dis-plays.

Figure E - 5.The Add Password Dialog Box.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

CMVA60 Microlog E - 7User Manual

Page 368: E-MANUAL

editpass.pcx

• Make changes to the existing data directory andpassword, then click the check mark button toexit the Edit Password dialog box and save thechanges.

Password - deleting an existing password:• In the Password Setup dialog box, highlight the

password to delete.

• Click the - command button to delete the high-lighted password.

Figure E - 6.The Edit Password Dialog Box.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

E - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 369: E-MANUAL

Placing PRISM4 Remote in "Waiting" Mode

After the PRISM4 Remotes modem communication pa-rameters are properly set up, select PRISM4 Remotes Microlog/Transfer option to place PRISM4 Remote inwaiting mode. The Modem Status window displays thefollowing messages:

Checking...Reset Modem...Setup Modem...Put Modem in Auto Answer...Waiting for incoming calls

mic-trns.pcx

Once activated, PRISM4 Remote remains in a waitingmode until a remote Microlog logs in. If the remote Mi-crolog shuts down without logging out, PRISM4 Remotewaits, and if a reconnection does not occur, PRISM4 Re-mote terminates the connection and enters a waiting modefor the next connection.

¾ If a user at the host computer wishes to exitfrom the waiting mode or ends the remotecommunications by clicking on the Cancelcommand button, it may take a few seconds

Figure E - 7.The Modem Status Window.

Remote CommunicationsPlacing PRISM4 Remote in "Waiting" Mode

CMVA60 Microlog E - 9User Manual

Page 370: E-MANUAL

for the host computer to disconnect the mo-dem and close the Modem Status window.

Preference Settings (Microlog)

To set the Microlog’s communication mode:• Using the SKF CMSS50238 modem cable, con-

nect the Microlog to the modem.• Of the cable’s two connectors, ensure the con-

nector with the “clip” is attached to the Microlog.

• Turn on the Microlog. From the Microlog’sMain menu, select the Utilities/Communica-tions option, the Communications menu ap-pears.

mlch8-44.pcx

Figure E - 8.The Communications Menu.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (Microlog)

E - 10 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 371: E-MANUAL

Set communications options as described below.

Baud• Set Baud Rate to match your PRISM4 Remote

setting.

Modem Mode• Set Modem Mode to Originate.

This is the required mode for PRISM4 Remote com-munications. PRISM4 Remote is left in a “waiting”state. The Microlog operator accesses Transferthrough the Microlog’s Main menu. The Micrologdials the host computer, and the Microlog’s operatorcan perform uploads, downloads, change databases,and clear memory.

Microlog Remote • Set the Microlog Remote option to Yes to en-

able the Microlog to communicate with PRISM4

Remote.

Phone #• Enter the phone number of the host computer

running PRISM4 Remote.

¾ Always prefix the phone number with ATDTto establish modem communications.

Modem Setup

(optional) Enter modem specific control commands.

¾ Modem specific control commands are notrecommended, unless absolutely necessary.

Remote CommunicationsPreference Settings (Microlog)

CMVA60 Microlog E - 11User Manual

Page 372: E-MANUAL

Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module)

To access the Remote Login screen:• From the main menu screen, select Transfer

with the pointer bar and press <ENTER> .

Logging in with the proper password allows a Microlog operatorto download and upload data by modem to an unattended hostcomputer’s database, allows the operator to change the databasebeing accessed, and allows the operator to clear the Micrologmemory in preparation for loading new ROUTEs.

Warning:

The Microlog protects from unintentionally deleting collecteddata. If an operator enters a different password than the personwho last used the Microlog, a "database conflict" displays and en-try is denied. The operator must intentionally initialize the Mi-crolog (erase all previously stored data) before attempting login.

Remote CommunicationsMicrolog Login (Remote Communication Module)

E - 12 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 373: E-MANUAL

remotel1.pcx

Remote Login fields are:

Username

Identifies an individual user. This field is for informationonly, the system does not verify its correctness. The User-name appears in the REMOTE.LOG file to identify pass-word users.

¾ To enter alphabetic characters, press the Microlog’s shift key (SHIFT) at the bottomof the keypad. An arrow in the middle ofthe screen’s top status line indicates that youare in alphabetic mode. If you make a typ-ing mistake you may UNshift and use the ar-row keys to move the cursor, however, it isoften easier to press <ESCAPE> to deletethe line, then re-type it.

Figure E - 9.The Remote Login Screen.

Remote CommunicationsMicrolog Login (Remote Communication Module)

CMVA60 Microlog E - 13User Manual

Page 374: E-MANUAL

• Enter a Username (name, employee number,etc.) and press < ENTER> . The pointer baradvances to the next field (Password).

Password

The system verifies the entered password against the list ofpasswords/databases specified in the Password Setup dia-log in PRISM4 Remote. Users may only access databasesthat their password authorizes them to use. (See Warningabove.)

• Enter a valid password and press <ENTER> .

Connection Parameters• To view Connection Parameters , press the F2

key while in Remote Login menu.

remotel2.pcx

Values displayed on the Connection Parameters screenare for information only and must not be edited, elsePRISM4 Remote communications are disrupted.

Figure E - 10.The Connection Parameters Screen.

Remote CommunicationsMicrolog Login (Remote Communication Module)

E - 14 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 375: E-MANUAL

Completing Login• To complete the login procedure, press the F1-

Connect key. The following messages appearon the screen:

Starting modem...Dialing host...Connect ______...Host answered...Host prog available...Comparing databases...

On login from a remote Microlog, if no activity occursduring a reasonable time period (10-15 seconds), press< ESCAPE> to abort the transfer and retry the login. Ifthe modem provides indicator lights, verify activity by ob-serving flashing lights.

¾ Should the modem cable disconnect fromthe Microlog or host for any reason, after re-connection, the modem must be reset byturning it off for 15 seconds and then on.When communication connection is ob-tained, the Remote Active menu appears onthe Microlog display (see below), and theModem Status window displays the mes-sage “Communication link established”onthe host computer.

Remote CommunicationsMicrolog Login (Remote Communication Module)

CMVA60 Microlog E - 15User Manual

Page 376: E-MANUAL

rem-actv.pcx

Send Data

The Send Data option uploads the collected ROUTE(s) toan “upload file” in the host computer (to await “process-ing” into the appropriate database).

¾ After sending data, you must run PRISM4

for Windows, select the appropriate databasewith the System Preferences/Data Dir. op-tion, then utilize the Transfer menus Proc-ess Data option to store uploaded data intothe PRISM4 database.If multiple ROUTEs were uploaded to vari-ous databases, you must, in turn, select eachdatabase and process its data.

Figure E - 11.The Remote Active Menu.

Remote CommunicationsSend Data

E - 16 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 377: E-MANUAL

To send data:• On the Remote Active menu, move the pointer

bar to Send Data and press < ENTER> . TheUpload Routes screen appears.

upldrte.pcx

• Move the pointer bar to the ROUTE you wish toupload (or press F1 to send all ROUTEs) andpress < ENTER> . The message SendingRoute and the names of Routes being uploadedappear on the screen.

• During the upload, the Microlog reports thetransfer statistics.

Figure E - 12.The Send Data/Upload Routes Screen.

Remote CommunicationsSend Data

CMVA60 Microlog E - 17User Manual

Page 378: E-MANUAL

t ransfer.pcx

Transfer is complete when the message DATATRANSMITTED OK appears. If no data is trans-ferred, the message NO DATA TRANSFERRED dis-plays.

• Press < ESCAPE> to exit to the Remote Active menu.

Load Route

Loading ROUTEs (downloading) transfers ROUTE hierar-chy and measurement setups for a specified ROUTE (orfrom all the ROUTEs) of a specific database to the Microlog data collector.

To load a ROUTE (download a ROUTE):

• On the Remote Active menu, move the pointerbar to Load Route and press < ENTER> .

• ROUTE names display (for the active database)on the Download Route(s) screen.

Figure E - 13.The Upload Route(s)/Transfer Screen.

Remote CommunicationsLoad Route

E - 18 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 379: E-MANUAL

When selecting ROUTEs to download, scroll up and downusing the up arrow and down arrow keys. If there aremore than ten ROUTEs in a data directory, only ten ap-pear on the screen at a time and the word MORE appearsat the bottom of the list of ROUTEs. Select MORE to dis-play the next set of ten ROUTEs. You cannot move back-wards to view a previous group of ten ROUTEs. If youneed to select a ROUTE in a previous group of ten, pressESC-exit and reenter Load Route.

¾ To download ROUTEs from a different data-base, use the Remote Active menus ChangeDBase option discussed in the next section.

download.pcx

• Move the pointer bar to highlight the ROUTEyou wish to download from the host computer(or press F1 to download ALL ROUTEs) andpress < ENTER> . A Receiving Route mes-

Figure E - 14.The Download Route(s) Screen.

Remote CommunicationsLoad Route

CMVA60 Microlog E - 19User Manual

Page 380: E-MANUAL

sage with the requested ROUTE name (or ALL )appears on the screen.

• When transfer begins, the Microlog reportstransfer statistics.

t ransfer.pcx

• Transfer is complete when the DATA TRANS-MITTED OK message appears on the messageline at the bottom of your screen.

• Press <ESCAPE> to exit to the Remote Ac-tive menu.

Change DBase

If you are authorized to access more than one PRISM4 da-tabase, you may change the active database with theChange DBase function.

Figure E - 15.The Transfer Screen.

Remote CommunicationsChange DBase

E - 20 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 381: E-MANUAL

¾ Before changing the active database (to pre-pare for downloading a ROUTE from a dif-ferent database), you must first clear theMicrolog’s memory using the Clear Mem-ory option discussed in this chapters nextsection.

To change the active database:• On the Remote Active menu, move the pointer

bar to Change DBase and press < ENTER> .

The message Getting database names appears onthe screen. The host computer sends a list of all data-base names authorized to your password.

change.pcx

• Move the pointer bar to select a database andpress < ENTER> .

Figure E - 16.The Data Base Change Screen.

Remote CommunicationsChange DBase

CMVA60 Microlog E - 21User Manual

Page 382: E-MANUAL

• The following message appears on the screen:

WARNING

This will remove all collected data and all route information.

Do you wish to proceed?

To make room for the new database (that is, new ROUTEsor POINTs) the system clears the Microlog’s memory ofall previous data and storage parameters and loads the se-lected database.

• The message “Sending Parameters” appearsduring the changing of databases. The transferis complete when “Done changing databases”appears on the screen.

• Press <ESCAPE> to exit to the Remote Ac-tive menu.

Clear Memory

When the Microlog is storing a ROUTE and you wish todownload a ROUTE from a different database, you mustfirst clear the Microlog’s memory using the Clear Mem-ory option.

To clear the Microlog’s memory:• To clear all collected data and all ROUTE infor-

mation, move the pointer bar to Clear Memoryon the Remote Active menu and press < EN-TER> .

• The following message appears on the screen:

WARNING

This will remove all collected data and all route information.

Do you wish to proceed?

Remote CommunicationsClear Memory

E - 22 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 383: E-MANUAL

• Move the pointer bar to YES and press < EN-TER> .

If data was not collected on all POINTs, or all POINTSwere not uploaded, the following warning message appearson the screen.

Warning:

Data not taken on all pointsor not all points uploaded!

If data was intentionally collected on only a portion of thedatabase, the above message still appears. It is simply awarning to the user.

The system clears the Microlog’s memory of all data andstorage parameters.

During the clearing of data, a “Database is beingcleared” message appears on the screen. When the Clearprocess is complete, “Database is cleared!” appears onthe screen.

When memory has cleared, the system returns to the Re-mote Active screen.

Reset DBase

Use the Reset DBase option to re-collect data on theROUTE stored in the Microlog.

For example, if you are only working with one ROUTE,you collect ROUTE data and upload it to the host com-puter. A week passes and you wish to perform data collec-tion on the same ROUTE. You first reset the ROUTE inthe Microlog using Reset DBase before re-collectingROUTE data.

Remote CommunicationsReset DBase

CMVA60 Microlog E - 23User Manual

Page 384: E-MANUAL

To reset all ROUTEs:• Move the pointer bar to Reset DBase and press

< ENTER> . • The following warning message appears on the

screen:

WARNING:

This will remove all Spectrum and Timedata, but will retain the route setupinformation with the updated overall value.

Do you wish to proceed?

• Press YES to reset all ROUTEs. The Micrologresets all ROUTEs by removing all spectrumand time data, and moves the THIS value (mostrecent overall value) to the LAST value (prioroverall value). ROUTE(s) POINT setup infor-mation is retained.

¾ If all POINTs were not collected, or all datawas not uploaded, a warning message ap-pears. Press F1 to continue or ESC to exit.

• The following messages appear on the screen:

Resetting database...Database is reset.

The Microlog is now ready for data to be collected for us-ers not needing to re-download ROUTEs from the host.Memory is made available for data to be taken.

When all ROUTEs have all been reset, the system returnsto the Remote Active screen.

Remote CommunicationsReset DBase

E - 24 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 385: E-MANUAL

Disconnect

To disconnect from the host:• On the Remote Active screen, move the pointer

bar to Disconnect and press < ENTER> . Thefollowing messages appear on the screen:

Sending disconnect request....Disconnecting...Disconnect completed...

• When disconnect is complete, the system re-turns to the main menu screen.

¾ If the remote Microlog fails to disconnect,PRISM4 Remote automatically disconnectsafter a minute or two and enters a “waiting”state for the next connection.

Supported Modems

PRISM4 Remote and Microlog

The following modems were verified as compatible withPRISM4 Remote / Microlog operations:

Modems attached to PRISM4 Remote Modems attached to the Microlog

US Robotics Sportster 28,800 Fax Modem Practical Peripherals PM144MT11 Modem 14,400

Hayes Smartmodem OPTIMA 144 US Robotics Sportster 14,400 FAX Modem

US Robotics Sportster 28.800 FAX Modem US Robotics Sportster 28,800 FAX Modem

Remote CommunicationsDisconnect

CMVA60 Microlog E - 25User Manual

Page 386: E-MANUAL

Practical Peripherals PM144MT11 Modem 14,400 US Robotics Sportster 14,400 FAX Modem

Motorola SURFR 288 Motorola SURFR 288

Motorola SURFR 288 US Robotics Sportster 28,800 FAX Modem

US Robotics Sportster 14,400 FAX Modem Hayes ULTIMA 144

¾ The Motorola SURFR 288 has very goodconnect and throughput, and is recom-mended for higher baud rates.

Troubleshooting Modem Communications

PRISM4 Remote fails to communicate with the mo-dem. When in Auto Answer mode, PRISM4 Remotedisplays the “Modem NOT working or NOT on” mes-sage in the Modem Status window.

• Turn the modem off and power it on again.• Check the modem phone line and the serial ca-

ble (if the modem is external) to ensure a goodconnection.

• Verify the modem is connected to the rightCOM port (COM1 or COM2) and the correctCOM port setting is selected in the PRISM4sCommunication Preferences dialog box.

• Verify the modems COM port is not being usedby another serial device installed in your com-puter. Do not use the same COM port for yourmodem and serial mouse. If your modem is onCOM1, the mouse can only use COM2 orCOM4. If your modem is on COM2, themouse can only use COM1 or COM3.

Remote CommunicationsTroubleshooting Modem Communications

E - 26 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 387: E-MANUAL

• Run the Terminal program (located in the Win-dows Program Manager/Accessories group) toensure the modem is configured correctly forWindows. To do so:

• Exit PRISM4 Remote, then exit allother applications except the ProgramManager.

• Run the Terminal program and selectthe Settings menus Communicationsoption (to ensure the correct Com Portsetting).

• Type the command “AT” (without thequotation marks) and press < EN-TER> . If everything is correct, OKor 0 (zero) should appear on the mo-dem terminal screen.

¾ If you do not see the text echoed back to thescreen as you type the command, use theSettings menus Terminal Preferences op-tion to select Local Echo as the TerminalMode.

If the modem does not work in Terminal (OK or 0 is notreturned after typing AT), try the following:

• Disable 32-bit file access. To do so, select theControl Panels 386 Enhanced, choose the Vir-tual Memory button, choose the Change but-ton, then clear the Use 32-Bit Disk Accesscheck box.

• In the Windows directory, open the SYS-TEM.INI file and check the [Boot] section forthe proper communications driver. Search forthe line that reads, COMM.DRV= . The lineshould read, COMM.DRV= COMM.DRV, un-less the COMM.DRV on the right side indicatesa third party driver (Windows FAX or communi-

Remote CommunicationsTroubleshooting Modem Communications

CMVA60 Microlog E - 27User Manual

Page 388: E-MANUAL

cation programs are applications that might re-place the standard driver with one of their own).If COMM.DRV is set to anything other than thestandard driver (COMM.DRV), change the lineto read COMM.DRV= COMM.DRV.

¾ Ensure the line is not commented out (com-ments in the .INI files are defined with asemicolon at the beginning of the line).

• Also, ensure the COMM.DRV file in the Win-dows SYSTEM subdirectory is dated 3/10/92and has a file size of 9280 bytes (for Windows3.1), or is dated 11/1/93 with a file size of 5968bytes (for Windows for Workgroups 3.11). Ifthe date or size is incorrect, perform the nextstep. Otherwise, exit all programs and restartWindows.

• Quit Windows. Then, use the EXPAND utilityin the Windows directory to reinstallCOMM.DRV from the Windows Setup disks tothe WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory. To do so,type the following from a DOS prompt:

expand a:\comm.dr_ c:\windows\system\comm.drv

If the Terminal program prompts that the COM port is notsupported, or is being used by another device, the problemmight be with the computers configuration. Check for:

• Any TSR programs that are using the COM port.

• Another Windows program that is using theCOM port is currently running.

• Interrupt conflicts with the COM port and an-other hardware card such as a network card.

Remote CommunicationsTroubleshooting Modem Communications

E - 28 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 389: E-MANUAL

Appendix FMicrolog Download Utility

Microlog Download Utility allows the user to downloadCMVA60 version 3.80 or newer code or download differ-ent fonts.

¾ CMVA60 Microlog must have version 3.75EPROM installed to download new code.CMVA60 Microlog version 3.75 is availablein English only.

Installing Microlog Download Utility

> To install the Microlog Download Utility program onyour computer:

• Insert the MLDnldr1.1 diskette into yourfloppy drive.

• Select Run option from Windows ’95 or Win-dows 3.1.

• In the Command Line text box, typeA:\SETUP (if your diskette is in drive A) orB:\SETUP (if your diskette is in drive B) andclick the OK command button. The setup pro-gram displays the Welcome screen.

• Follow the installation instructions on the screen.

CMVA60 Microlog F - 1User Manual

Page 390: E-MANUAL

Connecting your Microlog

> To connect your Microlog system:• Using the supplied CMSS50080, CMSS50080-

CE cable, or CMSS250 (25 PIN to 9 PIN adapt-er supporting 9 PIN serial ports), connect yourhost computer to the support module betweenthe connection marked COMPUTER on thesupport module and one of the serial ports(COM1 or COM2) on the back of your com-puter.

• Using the supplied CMSS50077 cable, connectthe support module to the Microlog between theconnector marked MICROLOG on the supportmodule and the 25-pin D connector on the topsurface of the Microlog Collector.

• Plug the support module into an AC power sup-ply through the external transformer adapter sup-plied with the support module.

Microlog Setup

To download CMVA60 version 3.80 or newer code theCMVA60 must run from the boot EPROM.

> To boot from the EPROM:• With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold

down the Microlog’s 9 and 3 keys.

• While depressing the 9 and 3 keys, press and re-lease the ON/OFF key, then immediately re-lease the 9 and 3 keys.

• The Microlog starts and displays a Code Execu-tion message "Executing Microlog defaultcode press ENTER to continue....

Microlog Download UtilityConnecting your Microlog

F - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 391: E-MANUAL

• Press < ENTER> , the Microlog power upscreen displays. Verify that your Microlog’s ver-sion is 3.75.

• At the Main menu, move the pointer bar to3:Transfer and press < ENTER> or press 3.The Transfer screen displays.

• Your Microlog set up is complete.

Downloading Code/Fonts

> To download code/fonts to the Microlog:• Use the Windows’ File Manager to locate

C:\p4sol\downldr directory and double-clickon MFD.EXE . The Microlog Download Util-ity main window displays.

main-w in.pcx

• From the Microlog Download Utility window,select the File menu’s Open option. The SelectFile dialog displays.

Figure F - 1. The Microlog Download Utility Main Window.

Microlog Download UtilityDownloading Code/Fonts

CMVA60 Microlog F - 3User Manual

Page 392: E-MANUAL

sel-f ile.pcx

• Click on the List Files of Type drop down listbox. Select Binary Files (*.bin) for codes or8x8 Files (*.f8) for fonts.

• Select the desired file from the file name listbox and click OK .

• From the File menu, select the Communicationoption. The Communication Preferences dia-log box displays.

• Verify that the Com Port and Baud Rate set-tings are correct and click OK .

• From the File menu, select the Download op-tion. The message "Downloading data.Please wait..." displays on the screen.

Figure F - 2.The Select File Dialog Box.

Microlog Download UtilityDownloading Code/Fonts

F - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 393: E-MANUAL

¾ If downloading code, the Microlog screendisplays the message, "Erasing Flash mem-ory", then the Transfer screen displays thenumber of code blocks downloaded.

When the "Downloading data. Please wait..." messagedisappears from your computer screen, the downloadingprocess is complete.

> To run in Flash memory:• Turn the Microlog Off, then On again.

• From the Microlog power up screen, verify thatthe version is 3.80 or newer.

Microlog Download UtilityDownloading Code/Fonts

CMVA60 Microlog F - 5User Manual

Page 394: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

Microlog Download UtilityDownloading Code/Fonts

F - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 395: E-MANUAL

Appendix GIntroduction to the Triax

Accelerometer Sensor

Overview

The Triax Accelerometer Sensor automatically sequencesthrough three measurements for the sensor location (onefor each axis monitored by the triax accelerometer sen-sor). This application requires an external triax mod-ule/cable assembly and a triax accelerometer sensor. Atriaxial MPA ROUTE must be created in PRISM4 to ac-commodate the triax interface.

During data collection, the triax module/cable assembly’sLED display indicates which axis is being monitored.

Red - Axis 2

Green - Axis 3

Yellow - Axis 1

How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

Triax mounting configuration factors to be considered are:mounting location, accessibility, temperature, and orienta-tion.

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 1User Manual change 01

Page 396: E-MANUAL

¾ The triax accelerometer sensor’s axes are la-beled Axis 1, Axis 2, and Axis 3. The useris responsible for matching and assigning alabeled axis to a measurement orientation(i.e. horizontal, vertical, axial).

To collect valid measurements, the triax-sensor must al-ways be oriented in the same direction for all measure-ments at the same location.

¾ One axis of the triax accelerometer sensormust be aligned with the shaft centerline.

Figure G - 1.Mounting the Triax Accelerometer Sensor.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorHow to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

G - 2 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 397: E-MANUAL

For example, if the machine is mounted horizontally, thenmount the triax-sensor in the vertical direction to the shaftso Axis 2 is always pointing in the axial direction, Axis 1in the horizontal direction, and Axis 3 in the vertical direc-tion. If a vertical mounting is not possible, mount thetriax-sensor in the horizontal direction to the shaft. Pleasenote that now the horizontal and vertical axes are reversedfor this measurement POINT.

There are three basic mounting methods for the Triax-Sen-sor:

• permanent screw mount• studs with adapters

• magnet base mount

Permanent Mount with ScrewScrew mounting results in the widest frequency measure-ment range. It is recommended for permanent monitoringsystems only, higher frequency test, and harsh environ-ments.

¾ Before drilling into a machine housing orany item being prepared for mounting, it isimperative to know wall thickness and depthconstraints (i.e., mounting bolts, bearings,or other items) that might be behind themounting surface. SKF is not responsiblefor damage to items as a result of thesemounting instructions.

The mounting point on the structure should be faced 1.1times greater than the area of the sensor’s mounting sur-face. For measurements involving frequencies above 1kHz, the surface should be flat within 0.001’’ (.025 mm)and have surface texture no greater than 32 micro-inches

(0.8 µm). The tapped hole must be perpendicular to themounting surface and at least two threads deeper than theremaining threads of the screw.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorHow to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 3User Manual change 01

Page 398: E-MANUAL

Studs and AdapterStud mounting is ideal for enabling temporary or periodicvibration measurements for moderate frequency ranges.

Stud Installation Instructions

¾ Before drilling into a machine housing orany item being prepared for mounting, it isimperative to know wall thickness and depthconstraints (i.e., mounting bolts, bearings,or other items) that might be behind themounting surface. SKF is not responsiblefor damage to items as a result of thesemounting instructions.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorHow to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

G - 4 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 399: E-MANUAL

triax accelerometersensor1/4-28 screw

triax femalequick connect

triax stud

1/4-28 x 3/4 in. screw

machine

Figure G - 2.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorHow to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 5User Manual change 01

Page 400: E-MANUAL

Tools:

Hand grinder with small surface grinder

1/8in. to 3/16in. or 5mm to 7mm diameter pilot drill

CMAC9600-01 Tool Kit for 1/4-28 stud

CMAC9600-02 Tool Kit for M8 1.25 stud

3/8 inch or larger electric drill

Adjustable wrench or 7/8 in. open-end wrench• Select location for mounting - Inspect for possi-

ble items behind the mounting area. For best re-sults, placement should be as close to thebearing load zone as possible.

• Prepare surface - Within a 2-inch-square area,chip away loose paint, remove dirt, and grindthe surface flat and clean with a hand tool.

• Determine depth for mounting studs - Threadsmust be at least 6mm (.236 in.) deep. To markthe depth, place the drill bit next to the stud’smounting post and place electrical tape aroundthe drill bit to indicate the desired depth (or, ifavailable, use a depth gauge).

• Begin drilling - In the 2-inch-square area’s cen-ter, mark the hole location with a center punch.Start by drilling a small pilot hole with a 6.7mmdrill bit for the M8 X 1.25 thread or a #3 drillfor the 1/4-28 thread, then enlarge the pilot holewith the CMAC9600-06 drill bit (M8 1.25), orthe 9600-03 drill bit (1/4-28). The hole shouldbe perpendicular to the surface.

• Insert pilot - Insert the CMAC9600-08 pilot(M8 1.25) or the CMAC9600-05 pilot (1/4-28)into the CMAC9600-09 counter bore. The pilotshould be mounted flush to the fluted cuttingedge. Tighten the pilot in the counter bore us-ing the supplied wrench.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorHow to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

G - 6 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 401: E-MANUAL

• Spot face mounting area - Using the pilotedcounter bore, spot face the recess until smooth

(32µin .0.8µm), until the surface is approxi-mately 1 inch in diameter.

• Tap hole - Use the CMAC9600-07 tap (M81.25) or CMAC9600-04 tap (1/4-28) to handtap the hole to the desired thread depth.

Important: Do not bottom-out or over torque the tap.

• Clean - Clean the spot faced surface and thestud with alcohol, CHEMLOKTM primer, or asimilar solvent. Use a lint free rag and cleanvery thoroughly. Allow to set a few minutes toallow the cleaning solvent to evaporate.

• Apply adhesive (optional, not suggested unlessstud is to be a permanent installation) - A two-part acrylic adhesive is required. Use SKFCMCP210 acrylic adhesive or a 460/17 acrylicproduct. Remove the divider attached to the ad-hesive pack. Thoroughly mix the two-part adhe-sive together for one to two minutes, stretchingboth sides along a table’s edge. Coat the stud’sthreads and bottom with the adhesive.

• Connect the adapter to the bottom of the triax-sensor with the supplied L/4-28 screw. Forproper orientation, connect the stud to the sen-sor’s adapter before tightening the stud to thesurface.

• Orient the triax-sensor in the proper orientationas outlined above. Then disconnect the adapterfrom the stud without changing its orientationand tighten the stud with the 1/4-28 x 3/4 inscrew to the surface. The triax-sensor will al-ways point in the correct direction, as the adapt-er can only connect one way.

• Tighten - Mount and tighten the stud (24 in.-lbs/ 2.9 Nm). Be careful not to over torque.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorHow to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 7User Manual change 01

Page 402: E-MANUAL

Magnet Mounting BaseA magnet base with a threaded hole to accept a stud-mount triax-sensor is a convenient means of providing aquick or temporary mount. This method results in a re-duced meaurement frequency range compared to screw orstud mounts. The machine mounting surface should berelatively smooth and flat. Again, always place the triax-sensor at the same location with the same orientation to ob-tain valid measurements.

Triaxial MPA ROUTE Setup

> To set up a Triaxial MPA ROUTE:• In your PRISM4 software, access the POINT

Setup screen. The POINT Setup screen’s De-scription field is used to identify triaxial MPAPOINTs. The first 4 characters in the Descrip-tion field identify the triaxial MPA group towhich the POINT being configured belongs.For MPA POINTs, the first character is always"@". The @ character must be followed bythree alpha/numeric characters that identify thegroup of triaxial MPA POINTs.

• A triaxial MPA POINT must have specific desig-nations for the next three characters (the 5th -7th characters) to identify the different triaxialPOINT axes (see the following table).

Triaxial POINT 5th - 7th Character Designations

1st - 4thchars.

5th char.

6th char.

7th char.

POINT axis (3073M1)

@xxx T 2 @ Triaxial, Axis 2 - Red LED

@xxx T 3 @ Triaxial, Axis 3 - Green LED

@xxx T 1 @ Triaxial, Axis 1 - Yellow LED

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA ROUTE Setup

G - 8 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 403: E-MANUAL

In the above table, #3 - Green represents the axis numberreferenced on the 3073M1 triaxial sensor, followed by theLED color displayed on the adapter module when that axismeasuremment is monitored by the Microlog.

• Create a separate POINT for each axis, in anyorder.

• When all POINTs have been created, downloadthe ROUTE to the Microlog.

Figure G - 3.PRISM4’s POINT Setup Screen.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA ROUTE Setup

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 9User Manual change 01

Page 404: E-MANUAL

Connecting the Triaxial Sensor to the Micrologtriaxail.pcx

Hardware RequirementsCMVA60 Microlog Data Collector

Triax module/cable assembly kit (P/NCMAC4360)

Triax Accelerometer Sensor (included in ket)• Connect the triaxial adapter module and cable

assembly to the triax accelerometer sensor.

• Connect the triax adapter module to the 25-pinconnector on the top of the Microlog Collector.

TR

IAX

IAL A

CC

ELE

RO

ME

TE

R

3073S/N

1

2

3

triax accelerometersensoradapter module/

cable assembly

CMVA60Microlog

Figure G - 4.Triax Accelerometer Sensor to Microlog Connection.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorConnecting the Triaxial Sensor to the Microlog

G - 10 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 405: E-MANUAL

Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

¾ If the Utilities/System Setup’s Sensor/Ca-ble Check is enabled, the Microlog detectsthe presence of the triax adapter module andconducts an automatic BOV (Bias OffsetVoltage) test on all three channels of thetriax upon power-up.

When the Microlog collector is first powered up, the re-verse video pointer bar in the main menu appears on the1:Route choice. Press <ENTER> to display theROUTE list.

• Highlight and press <ENTER> to select theROUTE to collect.

When the Microlog encounters a triaxial MPA group ofPOINTs, it automatically displays the triaxial MPA datacollection screen (Figure G-4).

f igg-2.pcx

Figure G - 5.A Triaxial MPA Data Collection Screen.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA Group Data Collection

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 11User Manual change 01

Page 406: E-MANUAL

• With the highlight at the top of the list, press< ENTER> to automatically collect all triaxialMPA POINTs in the group.

Using the POINT’s description, the CMVA60 deter-mines which axis is monitored by the measurement,sets the triax adapter to the specified axis, and com-mences data collection.

¾ Depending on the View MPA Spectrum set-ting in Utilities/Route Setup, the Micrologdisplays the corresponding spectrum (includ-ing any FAM or Spectral band information)allowing the operator to inspect and verifythat data is correct. Press SAVE to continuecollecting data for the remaining triaxialMPA POINTs or press < ESCAPE> to cancel data collection.

When data collection is completed for the first axisPOINT, the CMVA60 determines the next POINTaxis, sets the triax adapter, and collects data for thePOINT.

When data collection is completed for the secondPOINT, the CMVA60 determines the last POINTaxis, sets the triax adapter, and collects data for thePOINT.

Triaxial MPA Data Collection screen items are:

A list of all POINTs in the triaxial MPA group. Whendata collection is complete for all POINTs, the wordDONE appears at the bottom of the list.

Value - Stored overall value for this measurement.

Units - Units for this measurement.

Alarms - Highest alarm value exceeded for this measure-ment.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA Group Data Collection

G - 12 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 407: E-MANUAL

Current Measurement Information

ID - Identifies the current POINT’s name.

DESC - A brief description of the identified POINT.

THIS - Overall value of the current measurement.

LAST - Overall value of the previous measurement.

ALARMS - Highest alarm value exceeded. Example: ifA1 and A2 exists, A2 is displayed.

¾ MPA alarm indicator strings are consistentwith PRISM4 for Windows. Alarm indica-tor strings are:

A1 = Overall Alarm 1A2 = Overall Alarm 2a = Banding Peak Alertd = Banding Peak DangerA = Banding Overall AlertD = Banding Overall Danger

AVG - Displays the number of averages during data collec-tion for each MPA POINT and displays DONE whenthe MPA POINT is done.

% Change - Percent of change between the current overallvalue and the measurement’s last overall value.

BAR GRAPH - A horizontal bar graph located below theCURRENT MEASUREMENT information graphi-cally displays the overall value. Alarm setpoints, rep-resented by small vertical marks directly below thebar graph, show the physical relationship betweenoverall value and alarm setpoints.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA Group Data Collection

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 13User Manual change 01

Page 408: E-MANUAL

Options MPA options are available.

• With the MPA data collection screen displayed,press the MENU key. The Options pop-upmenu displays. Press a numeral on the Mi-crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to yourselection and press <ENTER> .

mpaopt.pcx

MPA Options are:

1:Skip Machine - Skips all MPA POINTs and subsequentPOINTs in current Machine and proceeds to the next ma-chine in ROUTE.

2:Skip MPA Set - Skips all MPA POINTs and proceeds tothe next POINT, or group of POINTs, in the ROUTE.

3:Previous MPA Set/Point - Moves the pointer bar to theprevious MPA Set/POINT.

¾ The pointer bar may be shifted to the pre-vious or next measurement MPAGroup/POINT with the up and down arrowkeys when the ROUTE list is visible. Whenthe Microlog is in the data acquisition mode,the up and down arrow keys control the am-plitude gain range.

Figure G - 6.The MPA Options Menu.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA Group Data Collection

G - 14 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 409: E-MANUAL

4:Coded Notes - Notes on a list are transferred from thePRISM host software database. The list is displayedby selecting Coded Notes.

¾ PRISM4 allows inputing a 38 characterCoded Note. The Microlog’s Coded Notescreen displays only the first 27 charactersof the Coded Note downloaded from thePRISM software.

> To store desired coded notes with the data collected forthe POINT:

• Use the up and down arrow keys to position thepointer bar over the coded note desired.

• Press F1 to store the note code with the data col-lected for the MPA POINT.

¾ Multiple coded notes can be selected for thesame measurement MPA POINT in this fash-ion.

• When all the applicable notes have been se-lected, press < ENTER> to save.

¾ Pressing the < ESCAPE> key aborts theprocess without saving any coded notes.

5:User Note - Allows you to key in a note or an observa-tion in English. The line displayed for User Notehas a capacity of 42 characters, however only the first30 spaces are initially displayed. When the end ofthe initially displayed line is reached, entering morecharacters causes the line to scroll left in the windowuntil the line fills to its capacity of 42 characters.The entire 42 character line is saved and transferredto the host.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA Group Data Collection

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 15User Manual change 01

Page 410: E-MANUAL

¾ At a single measurement MPA POINT,either a User Note or Coded Note may berecorded but not both. The most recentUser Note or series of Coded Notes over-write any notes recorded previously for thesame measurement MPA POINT.

6:View Setup - Summarizes all information related to thecurrent MPA POINT.

7:Delete MPA Set Data - Erases all data recorded for allof the POINTs in the current MPA Group.

Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer SensorTriaxial MPA Group Data Collection

G - 16 CMVA 60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 411: E-MANUAL

G l o s s a r y

Accelerometer -A transducer whose outputis directly proportional to acceleration.

Alignment - A condition such that the axesof machine components are set to someknown relationship such as, coincident,parallel, or perpendicular.

Amplitude - The magnitude of dynamic mo-tion or vibration. Expressed in termsof peak-to-peak, zero-to-peak, or rms.

Asynchronous - Vibration components thatare not related to rotating speed (also re-ferred to a nonsynchonous).

Attribute - An individual field of a SET re-cord or of a POINT record, a charac-teristic of a POINT or SET.

Averaging - In a dynamic signal analyzer,digitally averaging several measure-ments to improve statistical accuracy.See RMS.

Axial Vibration - Vibration which is parallelto a shaft’s centerline.

Axis - The reference plane used in plottingroutines. The X-axis is the frequencyplane. The Y-axis is the amplitudeplane.

Balance Radius - The distance from the cen-ter of a rotor to the center of a trial orcorrection weight.

Balancing - A procedure for adjusting the ra-dial mass distribution of a rotor so thatthe centerline of the mass approachesthe geometric centerline of the rotor.

Bandpass Filter - A filter with a single trans-mission band extending from lower toupper cutoff frequencies.

Bandwidth - A spacing between frequencies.

Baseline - Spectra collected and stored for fu-ture comparison. Usually taken when amachine is in good, or known, operat-ing condition. Used as a reference formonitoring and analysis.

Baud Rate - Serial communication transferrate. Measured in bits per second.

Bit - Smallest unit of computer informationstorage. Equivalent to a choice of a oneor a zero.

BPFO, BPFI - Ball pass frequencies of de-fects on outer and inner bearing races.

BSF - Ball Spin Frequency.

Byte - A unit of computer information stor-age usually equal to eight bits or onecharacter.

Buffer - An area in computer memory setaside as working space.

Center Frequency - The center of the trans-mission band for a bandpass filter.

CGA - Color Graphics Adapter.

Clone - The process of exactly duplicating aSET or a POINT.

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 1User Manual

Page 412: E-MANUAL

Close - A SET or POINT is consideredCLOSEd if the members below it in itshierarchy are not visible. Use LEFTARROW to CLOSE a SET or POINT.A SET or POINT that is marked on itsleft by a hyphen symbol is CLOSEd(not OPEN). Its members are not dis-played (not visible on screen). Also seeOPEN.

Co-Processor - An additional hardware com-ponent that will speed up math process-ing (8087, 80287, 80387). Usuallyreferred to as a MATH COPROCES-SOR.

Combine Weights - All the balance weightsthat are distributed on the balance planecan be combined as one weight at onephase location.

CONFIG(ure) - Establishing a set of systemparameters for general operation.These parameters are usually retainedin the DOS file, CONFIG.SYS.

Correction Weight - The weight required tocounter the rotor mass imbalance is theinitial correction weight.

Couple Imbalance - Results when staticallybalanced weights are 180o apart at oppo-site ends of a rotor and cause rockingaction during rotation.

CPM - Cycles per minute.

CPS - Cycles per second.

Criteria - A means of selecting desired itemsfrom the PRISM host software’s data-base. Very helpful in generating reportsor downloading to the Microlog. Thetypes of selection criteria that can beset are POINTS IN ALARM, EN-ABLED POINTS, and OVERDUEPOINTS that fit a selectable date range.

¾ In the PRISM host soft-ware, when a filter is ON,a CRTR (CRiTeRia) ap-pears in the upper righthand menu bar, and a colorchange occurs in the hierar-chy window.

Critical Speed - A rotor speed which gener-ates high vibration amplitudes. If thespeed corresponds to a resonance fre-quency of the system, it is called the bal-ance resonance speed.

Cursor Bar - A contrasting marker strip thatappears in the active window on thescreen. Denotes the item or functionthat is to be performed.

Curve Fitting - The process in which coeffi-cients of an arbitrary function are com-puted such that the evaluated functionapproximates the values in a given dataset. A mathematical function, such asthe minimum mean squared error, isused to judge the goodness of fit.

Database - A group of SETs, subSETs, andPOINTs arranged in a hierarcy that de-fine a user’s facilities (i.e., buildings, ar-eas, machines, data gatheringlocations). Also a top menu bar func-tion in PRISM2. Allows additions,changes, and deletions of data in the da-tabase.

Disable - An adjustable feature of thePOINT setup that prevents a POINT be-ing downloaded to the Microlog.

Display - A top menu bar function in thePRISM host software. Offers plottingroutines (spectra, trend, and polar), ameans to print hardcopy of the databasesetup, and an outline format. Access toany history and note information andsimple report routines.

Displayed - Any SETs and POINTs that arevisible in the LIST window.

G l o s s a r y

GLS - 2 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 413: E-MANUAL

DOS - Disk Operating System. A programwith certain pre-defined functionswhich executes upon computer startup.DOS genertes the “> ” prompt. Alsoreferred to as MS-DOS, PC-DOS.

Download - Transferring information to theMICROLOG from the host computer.

Drop-Down Window - A window that dropsdown from the top menu selection bar,showing additional menu choices.

DSA - See DYNAMIC SIGNAL ANA-LYZER.

Dynamic Imbalance - A combination ofboth static and couple imbalance.

Dynamic Signal Analyzer - A vibration ana-lyzer which uses digital signal process-ing and Fast Fourier Transform todisplay vibration frequency compo-nents.

EGA - Enhanced Graphics Adapter.

Enable - A field in the POINT setup of thedatabase that defines the POINT as be-ing able or unable to be downloaded tothe Microlog.

Engineering Units - The type of engineeringunits of the selected transducer to beused (i.e., G’s, Mils, etc.).

Ensemble, Spectrum - See Spectrum En-semble.

ENV AVG - The RMS average of the envel-oped vibration signal that is bandpassfiltered in four selectable ranges from 5to 40 kHz.

ENV PEAK - The peak amplitude of the en-veloped vibration signal that is band-pass filtered in four selectable rangesfrom 5 to 40 kHz.

EU - See ENGINEERING UNITS.

EPROM - Eraseable Programable ReadOnly Memory chips (Firmware). Usedin the Microlog for program storage.These are replaced during program up-dates to the Microlog.

Export - A PRISM host software feature thatcopies selected points to floppy disk forexamination on another system or forstorage.

Fast Fourier Transform - A computermethod of converting a time waveformto a frequency display that shows the re-lationship of discrete frequencies andtheir amplitudes.

Field - One data item of a record. Examplesof fields are first name, middle initial,last name, room number, machine ID,etc.

Filter - A device or function designed to passor reject specific data.

FFT - See FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM.

Flat Top Window - A dynamic signal ana-lyzer window function which providesthe best amplitude accuracy for meas-ureing discrete frequency components.

Flexible Shaft - Condition at rotor speedsclose to or beyond first bending criticalspeed where dynamic effects influencerotor deformations. The center of rota-tion shifts from the axis through thebearing centers to the center of gravityaxis. The high spot and heavy spot are180o out of phase.

Frequency - The repetition rate of a periodicevent, usually expressed in cycles persecond (Hz), cycles per minute (CPM),revolutions per minute (RPM), or multi-ples of running speed (orders). Ordersare commonly referred to as 2X fortwice running speed, and so on.

Frequency Domain - An FFT graph (ampli-tude vs. frequency).

G l o s s a r y

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 3User Manual

Page 414: E-MANUAL

FTF - Fundamental Train Frequency.

Gear Mesh Frequency - Vibration frequencyon a machine due to its gears (numberof teeth x shaft RPM).

Global Close - CTRL/LEFT ARROW (alsoCLOSE key). Closes all subSETs con-tained in the selected SET making themnon-visible on the screen. See CLOSE.

Global Open - CTRL/RIGHT ARROW (alsoOPEN key). Opens all subSETs con-tained in a selected SET making anySETs or POINTs in the given subSETvisible on the screen. See OPEN.

Hanning Window - A dynamic signal ana-lyzer window function that provides bet-ter frequency resolution than flat top,but with reduced amplitude accuracy.

Harmonic - A frequency that is an integralmultiple of a fundamental frequency.Generally viewed in the spectrum as2X, 3X, 4X, etc. of running speed.

Heavy Spot - The actual shaft position of animbalance mass.

Hertz - Cycles per second. CPM/60.

HFD - A dynamic high frequency signal(5KHz - 60KHz) from an accelerome-ter. For assessing the condition of roll-ing element ball or roller bearings.The HFD measurement has a detectedoverall value from 5KHz to 60 KHz butdoes not record a spectrum.

Hierarchy - A method of organizing equip-ment into logical groups or physical ar-eas for ease of access in the database.This format usually has three or fourlevels consisting of plant names, physi-cal areas, processes, machine names,and measurement POINTS.

High Spot - The response of a shaft to an im-balance force.

Imbalance - A condition such that the centerof mass of a shaft and its geometric cen-terlines do not coincide.

Import - Transferring data and POINT setupby floppy disk from another PRISMhost software system.

Influence Coefficient - In a balancing proce-dure, a scaling vector, called the influ-ence coefficient, is computed to relatethe imbalance force vector to the meas-ured displacement and phase. The am-plitude of this vector defines a rotorsensitivity of weight/mil at the balancespeed and at the exact placement of themeasuring transducer. The phase is thesystem lag of the vibration signal to thetrasnducer.

Key Phasor - A key phasor signal is a signalgenerated by a displacement or opticaltransducer which detects the passage ofa keyway, set screw, or reflecting sur-face.

Lag Angle - The distance from 0o to 360o ashaft turns between the phase referenceand the high spot. This lag must be ac-counted for in placing a trial weight.

LCD - See Liquid Crystal Display.

Linear Averaging - See TIME AVERAGING.

Lines - A term used to describe the resolu-tion of a dynamic signal analyzer (i.e.,a 400 line analyzer).

Liquid Crystal Display - The flat, video dis-play screen used in the Microlog.

Lissajou Figure - The path of a particle mov-ing in a plane when the components ofits position along two perpendicularaxes each undergo simple harmonic mo-tions and the ratio of their frequenciesis a rational number. Also known as aBowditch curve.

G l o s s a r y

GLS - 4 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 415: E-MANUAL

List - A top menu bar function in the PRISMhost software. Offers the means to dis-play and access the database by differ-ent methods. Also refers to theleft-hand window of the PRISM hostsoftware which displays the databaseeither in hierarchy or ROUTE format.This window is usually referred to asthe List window.

Low Pass Filter - A filter whose transmis-sion band extends from an upper cutofffrequency down to dc.

Natural Frequency - The frequency of freevibration of a system.

Nonsynchronous - See ASYNCHRONOUS.

Open - A SET or POINT is consideredOPEN if the members below it in its hi-erarchy are visible. Use RIGHT AR-ROW to OPEN a SET or POINT. ASET or POINT that is marked on itsleft by an equals symbol is OPEN. Itsmembers are displayed. Also seeCLOSE.

Orbit Analysis (CMVA40) - Orbit analysisusing proximity probes, presents instan-taneous x and y shaft vibration levels.Amplitude peaks, phase, and shaft rota-tion can be viewed for immediate evalu-ation of machine parameters.

Order Analysis - Locks the frequency dis-play to orders of the 1X running speed(that is, integral multiples of the run-ning speed) and permits immediate or-der-related amplitude comparison.

Overall Sample Information - A measure-ment of the total vibration of a machine.

Password - A user defined code word re-quired to enter the PRISM host soft-ware. If a password is used, somefeatures of the software will require itto be reentered at 30 minute intervalsfor added database safety. This pass-word is downloaded to the Micrologand is required when you wish to “ In-itialize” (clear) the Microlog.

Phase - The timing relationship between twosignals, or between a specific vibrationevent and a keyphasor pulse.

Phase Reference - A signal generated by atransducer once per revolution.

POINT - An ID established in the database.This ID names an entity which is an ac-tual data collection location. OnePOINT is required for each readingtaken. Both vibration and processPOINTs can be established. A POINTmay represent a measurement to betaken at a bearing, a shaft, a gear, or ata specific location on a machine.

Pointer Bar - See Cursor Bar .

Pop Up Window - A window that appears onscreen quite often overlapping an exist-ing window. Appears when additionalinformation is to be reported to the useror more user input is required.

Prime Set - A set at the highest level (Level1) of a hierarchy.

Process Point - POINT type used to monitorvalues other than vibration. Readingscan be manually entered from the key-board or collected directly from certaintypes of instruments. Data values canbe trended by the PRISM host softwarefor comparison of these process vari-ables with vibration data.

PROM - Programmable Read Only Memorycomputer chip.

G l o s s a r y

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 5User Manual

Page 416: E-MANUAL

Pull Down Window - A submenu or windowthat appears on screen below anothermenu.

Radial Vibration - Vibration which is per-pendicular to a shaft’s centerline.

RAM - Random Access Memory chips.Used in the Microlog to store POINTsetups and data.

Record - A collection of data items. SeeFIELD.

Reference Run Data - Data taken on a ma-chine running at balance speed prior toinstalling a trial weight.

Report - A top menu bar function in PRISMhost software and a main menu selec-tion in the Microlog. An in-depth re-porting utility that allows variousreports to be generated from the lateststored data.

Resonance - Vibration at the natural fre-quency of a system.

RMS - The square root of the average of aset of squared instantaneous values. Dy-namic signal analyzers perform RMSaveraging digitally on successive vibra-tion spectra.

ROUTE - A list of measurement POINTs.ROUTEs of POINTs are usually set upin sequence for the most efficient collec-tion of data.

Runout - Electrical and mechanical sourcesof error in the output signal of a proxim-ity probe transducer system which donot result from dynamic motion,change of position, shaft centerline posi-tion change, or shaft dynamic motion.Common causes are varying conductiv-ity of the surface material of the rotat-ing shaft, presence of a localizedmagnetic spot on the surface of theshaft, out of round shaft, scratches,rust, dents, and so on. Usually deter-

mined at slow roll speed after the shaftand rotor are brought up to operatingtemperature.

Runout Compensation - Electrical correc-tion of a transducer output signal forthe error resulting from runout.

Sample - Overall value collected at a giventime.

Sample Number - Identifies a dated sampleout of a maximum possible 55 datedsamples.

Sampling - The process of obtaining a se-quence of instantaneous values of afunction at regular or intermittent inter-vals.

SEE - Abbreviation for Spectral Emitted En-ergy—an SKF patented analysis tech-nique which gives superior assessmentof the operating condition of roller bear-ings.

Set - A SET is a logical division of a data-base which names an entity that doesnot require a data reading. A SET maybe an area, building, process, machinename, etc. See POINT.

Slow Roll Speed - A slow rotation speed atwhich effects from forces such as imbal-ance are not significant.

Special - A top menu bar function in PRISMhost software. Permits modification ofglobal parameters (including Micrologcommunication), exporting and import-ing of POINTs and their stored data,and screen color adjustments.

Spectra - Plural for spectrum (see FFT).

Spectrum - See FFT.

Spectrum Ensemble - A set of amplitudes inthe frequency domain.

G l o s s a r y

GLS - 6 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 417: E-MANUAL

Split Weights - A single correction weightcan be split into two equal weights to belocated at convenient phase positions.

Static Imbalance - Occurs when the shaftcenter of gravity is displaced from therotation axis through bearing centers.A statically unbalanced shaft placed onknife edges will roll to rest with theweight at the bottom.

Stiff Shaft - Condition at rotor speeds belowfirst bending critical speed where thehigh spot and heavy spot are in phase.

Structural Analysis (CMVA40) - Vibrationmode shapes can be manually estimatedby Frequency Response Function (FRF)displays.

Subordinate - A SET within a SET (i.e., amachine train within a facility).

Subsynchronous - Frequency componentsfound in the spectrum below machinerunning speed.

Synchronous - Frequency components foundin the spectrum that are directly relatedto running speed.

Synchronous Time Domain - An amplitudevs. time graph (time domain) of datataken in relation to a trigger event.

System - English or Metric engineering units.

Time - The time a measurement is recorded.Expressed in hours, minutes, and sec-onds.

Time Domain - An amplitude vs. time graph.

Timestamp - The date and time automat-ically included by Microlog with eachmeasurement.

Tracking Analysis - Amplitude and phase ofthe 1X and 2X running speed compo-nents relative to the shaft reference trig-ger are simultaneously displayed.

Transducer - A device which translatesphysical vibration energy into electricalsignals for processing.

Tree - Hierarchy listing of a database. Usedinterchangeably with hierarchy.

Trial Run #1 Data - Vibration transducermeasurement data taken after installa-tion of a trial weight.

Trial Run #2 Data - A second trial weight isinstalled on plane 2 when performingtwo-plane balancing. Trial run #2 datais the data collected at stabilized bal-ance speeds after the second trialweight has been applied to plane 2.

Trim Weight - After the trial weight is re-moved and the initial correction weightis installed, trim run data is collected.It is used to compute a trim weight thatshould be applied to further reduce vi-bration amplitude.

Uniform Window - A dynamic signal ana-lyzer window function with uniformweighting across time.

Upload - Transferring collected data from theMicrolog to the PRISM host software.

Value - An individual data measurement re-lated to a spectrum or to a POINT.

VGA - Video Graphics Adapter.

VIB ISO - The RMS average of the vibrationsignal integrated from acceleration tovelocity. The signal is limited to the 10Hz to 1 kHz bandwidth.

Waterfall - A three-dimensional multiplespectra display vs. time or rpm.

Zoom - Feature to obtain a considerablyfiner resolution over a limited portionof the spectrum with a resolution powercoresponding to the number of lines nor-mally used for the whole spectrum.

G l o s s a r y

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 7User Manual

Page 418: E-MANUAL

(This page intentionally blank)

G l o s s a r y

GLS - 8 CMVA60 MicrologUser Manual

Page 419: E-MANUAL

Index

!-

See close1X RPM, 2-47

computation, 2-48See function keys

50%See average overlap

75%See average overlap

=See open

Aalarm indicators

mpa, 1-36, G-13alarm levels

internally set, 2-32, 5-3alarm markers, 1-18alarm setpoints, 1-7alarm threshold, 7-5, 7-7alarm type

See dynamic points reportalarm1

See dynamic points reportSee exceptions reportSee missed points report

alarm2See dynamic points reportSee exceptions report

alarmsSee static measurements

alrmSee exceptions report

always onsensor mode, 8-15

amp, 7-17amplitude, 1-17, 1-24, 7-17

full scale, 1-17amplitude range, 8-12amplitude resolution, 8-14analysis

on-the-spot, 1-24See user mode

analyzer, 5-1 - 5-8angle, 4-37area

main screen, I-10 - I-15prompt, I-11, I-13, I-15working, I-11, I-13

autoSee route mode

auto answerSee modem mode

auto range, 1-23See system setup

averageSee average typeSee balance setup

average mode, 2-17continuous, 5-3finite, 5-3See measurement type:freqrepeat, 5-3See spectrum setup

average overlapmaximum, 2-18, 4-84See measurement type:freq

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 1User Manual change 01

Page 420: E-MANUAL

See spectrum setupaverage type

See measurement type:freqSee spectrum setup

averagesnumber of, 1-17See spectrum setup

averages, number ofSee measurement type:freqSee measurement type:orders

avg, 1-14See dynamic points report

Bbalance job reports, 4-59 - 4-60balancing, I-5

advanced, 4-20basic, 4-2

balancing (advanced) menu, 4-20balancing setup

reset, 4-61band ov, 1-27band overall level, 7-16band peak level, 7-15band pk, 1-26bar graph, 1-14batteries, A-1battery, 8-3

charging, A-2 - A-4memory, A-6

battery pack, I-12baud

See communicationSee communications

BNC connectorpower, I-21

BNC connectors, I-21bode plot, 4-102bps

See communications

BT, I-12bump test, 4-91 - 4-93

Ccalculation, 4-35change data, 4-47 - 4-52clear, 8-26clear balancing job, 4-16clear data, 4-61clock set, 8-5 - 8-6

See utilities menuclose, 1-4close, global

See options menucoded notes

See options menucollecting data, 1-2 - 1-3

HFD, 2-45 - 2-46nonroute process, 2-43 - 2-44

collecting dynamic data, 5-3com port, E-4combining weights, 4-54 - 4-56communication parameters, 3-1communications, 8-7 - 8-9

utilities menu, 8-7 - 8-9communications preferences, E-3compressed

See data storagecondition displays, I-13configuration wizard, 4-117 - 4-122connecting your Microlog system,I-10, F-2connection

attended host, 3-1hard-wired, 3-1

continuousSee average mode

correction weight, 4-38CPM

See speed

Index - 2 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 421: E-MANUAL

current analysis, I-5, 4-77setup, 4-78

current zoom, 4-79, 4-86cursor, 5-4

See function keyscursor lock, 2-31cursor type

See display setupcut-off

See input setupcutoff, low freq

See input setupcutoff, low frequency

See input setupcyclic analysis, I-5, 4-69

setup, 4-72take data, 4-70

DD (data recorded)

See route listdata

collecting, 1-2 - 1-3data bits, E-5data collection, 1-22 - 1-23

MPA points, 1-33, G-11triaxial MPA group, G-11

data enhanced measurementsHFD, 2-46

data table, 4-102data transfer, 3-4

See transferdatabase setup report, 7-20date

See dynamic points reportSee exceptions reportSee set clock

deg., 7-17degrees, 7-17

delete dataSee options menu

delete MPA set dataSee options menu

Desc, 2-7See input setupSee process input

descriptionSee dynamic points reportSee end of shift reportSee input setupMPA point, 1-32

detectionSee data enhanced measurementsSee dynamic points reporttype of, 2-5

detection methodSee input setup

detection typeinput setup, 2-5

dialog boxcommunication, E-4password setup, E-5system preferences, E-3

directory path, E-3disconnect, E-9display contrast

See utilities menuDISPLAY ILLUMINATION, I-17display setup, 2-5, 2-22 - 2-23, 2-25display type

display setup, 2-5disply expand, I-19

See function keysdownload, 1-2 - 1-3, 3-3 - 3-6downloading

FAM information, 1-28 - 1-31dynamic

See types of measurementsdynamic measurements, 1-11 - 1-20,2-4 - 2-5

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 3User Manual change 01

Page 422: E-MANUAL

dynamic points report, 7-6, 7-12,7-18

Eelapsed time indicator, 8-4end, I-18end of shift report, 7-9engineering units

English, 4-34Metric, 4-34

ENTER, I-17Env filter , App-20envelope filter, 2-8enveloped current, 4-79, 4-90estimate trial weight setup, 4-33,4-44exceptions report, 7-7

FF1, 2-39

See function keysF1, route list, 7-5F1-Connect, E-15F2, 2-34, 2-39, 7-6, 8-25

See function keysFAM

downloading, 1-28 - 1-31FAM data, 7-19fast

See route collectionFFT alarm threshold, 7-5FFT Hz/CPM

See system setupFFT spectrum, 1-19FFT spectrum display, 8-19finite

See average mode

flat topSee window

flow chartstandard velocity measurement,

App-4freeze, I-19

See function keysfreq

maximum, 2-15start, 2-15

freq rangeSee dynamic points reportSee spectrum setup

freq., 7-17freq. scale, E-3frequency, 1-24, 7-17

See spectrum setupfrequency range, 1-17from the designated set

See uploadfrom(CPM), 1-26, 6-5, 7-15full scale

See data enhanced measurementsSee dynamic points reportSee input setupSee process input

function keys, 2-33 - 2-39, 5-4 - 5-6fundamental marker

See marker setup

Gglobal close, I-18

See options menuglobal open, I-18

See options menugo to bottom

See options menugo to top

See options menu

Index - 4 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 423: E-MANUAL

Hhammer test, 4-91Hanning

See windowhardware requirements

triaxial, G-10harmonic

See marker mode:cursor lockSee marker mode:fixed freqSee marker type

harmonic markerSee marker setup

harmonic markersSee mkrs on/off

HFDSee types of measurements

HFD datacollecting, 2-45 - 2-46

HFD input, 2-45hide

See route spectrumhierarchy, 1-1, 1-4, 8-22home, I-18Hz

See speed

IID, 2-6 - 2-7

See balance setupSee dynamic points reportSee exceptions reportSee missed points reportSee process inputSee static measurements

identification of spectral peakstable, 7-17in band

overall, 2-11influ coeff, 4-52

influence coeff, 4-52initialize, 8-24 - 8-25

See utilities menuinput

See input setupinput connector, I-22, 8-15input offset

See process inputinput sens

See data enhanced measurementsSee dynamic points reportSee process input

input setup, 2-5 - 2-11, 2-41, 2-45,2-47input signal, 8-11input trigger level

See trigger setupinstantaneous

See time domaininstructions, 1-3

Jjob

clearing, 4-61deleting, 4-61

Kkeypad, I-16 - I-19keys

arrow, 1-5, I-18, 8-2control, I-17control keys, I-16DEL, I-20end, I-18Escape, I-17function, I-19function keys, I-16global close, I-18

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 5User Manual change 01

Page 424: E-MANUAL

global open, I-18home, I-18menu, I-17miscellaneous, I-19numeric, I-18numeric keys, I-16operating keys, I-16page down, I-18page up, I-18reducing keystrokes, 1-22shift, I-19space, I-20

Llast

See missed points reportSee static measurements

length/revSee speed input

length/revolutionSee trigger setup

lin/logSee function keys

line frequency, 4-79linear, 2-40lines

See dynamic points reportSee spectrum setup

log, 2-40login, E-12 - E-15low fq lmt

See dynamic points reportlow freq cutoff

See input setup

MM (messages)

See route list

magnitude, 4-49See infl coeff

main screen areas, I-10 - I-15make reading

See options menumanual read

See options menumarker mode

cursor lock, 2-34, 5-5fixed freq, 2-36See marker setup

marker setup, 2-6, 2-29 - 2-31marker type, 2-35

See marker setupmarker, fundamental

See marker setupmarker, harmonic

See marker setupmarker, relative

See marker setupmarker, sideband

See marker setupmarkers

alarm, 1-18markers on/off, I-19maximum

See average overlapmaximum freq

See measurement type:freqmeasurement

global, 8-1measurement options

previous point, 2-2skip machine, 2-2skip point, 2-2

measurement options menu(dynamic), 1-21measurement options menu (static),1-8 - 1-10measurement type

See input setup

Index - 6 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 425: E-MANUAL

See spectrum setupmeasurement type:freq, 2-14 - 2-19

See spectrum setupmeasurement type:orders, 2-20 -2-21

See spectrum setupmeasurement type:track, 2-22 - 2-23measurement, type of

See input setupmeasurements, dynamic

See dynamic measurementsmeasurements, static

See static measurementsmemory test

See utilities menumenu

options, 2-44, 2-47remote active, E-16utility functions, 4-53

MICROLOG, I-4baud rate, E-11change dbase, E-20 - E-21clear memory, E-22connection parameters, E-14disconnect, E-25login, E-12 - E-15modem mode originate, E-11preference settings, E-10 - E-11remote, E-11reset dbase, E-23 - E-24send data, E-16 - E-17transfer, E-18

missed points report, 7-11mkrs on/off

See function keysmodem communications

troubleshooting, E-26 - E-28modem mode, 3-2

auto answer, 3-6originate, 3-6

modem status, E-9

motor nameplate data, 4-85off, 4-85specify, 4-85

mountingtriax sensor, G-2

mounting triax sensor, G-2magnetic, G-8permanent, G-3stud, G-4

mpaalarm indicators, 1-36, G-13multi-point automation, 1-32

mpa points, 1-32MPA route, 1-32multi-point automation

MPA, 1-32

NN (no data recorded)

See route listno., 7-17noise, 2-17, 4-82none

See average overlapSee modem mode

nonroute, 1-4, 2-1 - 2-50nonsync, 7-17nonsynchronous, 7-17normal

See data storageSee route collectionSee route modeSee sensor modeSee user mode

notes report, 7-21number of averages

See measurement type:freqSee measurement type:orders

number of ordersSee measurement type:orders

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 7User Manual change 01

Page 426: E-MANUAL

Ooff

See average typeok, 6-7open, 1-4open, global

See options menuopen/close indicator, 1-4operating keys, I-17operator id tagging, 8-22options

MPA, 1-36, G-14options menu, 1-9, 1-21, 2-44, 2-47orbit, 2-13order, 1-24, 7-17orders

See spectrum setuporiginate

See modem modeoutput connector, I-22, 8-16OV, I-12ov dan, 1-26ov wrn, 1-26OvA, 1-27OvD, 1-27overall, 1-18, 2-11, 7-17overall alert, 6-7, 7-16overall alert level, 6-6, 7-15overall danger, 6-7, 7-16overall danger level, 6-6, 7-15overall level, 6-6overall level line, 1-26overall values, 1-25overlap

See average overlapoverload

clearing, 1-23

Ppage down, I-18

See options menupage up, I-18

See options menuparameters

communication, 3-1, 3-4global, 8-10, 8-18

parity, E-5password, 8-24 - 8-25

add, E-7See communicationsdelete, E-8edit, E-7See initializesetup, E-5

peak alert, 6-7, 7-16peak alert level, 6-6, 7-15peak danger, 6-7, 7-16peak danger level, 6-5, 7-15peak level, 6-6peak level line, 1-26peak values, 1-25phase, 4-49

See influ coeffphase connector, I-22, 8-16phase measurements, 5-7 - 5-8phase reference adapter, 5-7phase spectrum, 7-18phase type

See display setuppickup, 1-21pk dan, 1-26pk hold

See average typepk wrn, 1-26PkA, 1-27PkD, 1-27planes, 4-27planes 2, separately, 4-27

Index - 8 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 427: E-MANUAL

planes:1, 4-27, 4-48planes:2, 4-35, 4-49point

subordinate, 1-4POINT ID, 2-5route display, 8-22polar plot, 4-103previous MPA set/point

See options menuprevious point

See measurement optionsSee options menu

print, 4-104print test, 7-22printer adapter, 7-1printer type, 7-4PRISM2, I-6probe, 1-21, 1-24process

See types of measurementsprocess data

collecting, 2-43 - 2-44process input, 2-41process measurements, 2-40 - 2-42PROM

See initializeprompt area, I-11pulses per revolution

See trigger setuppulses/revolution

See trigger setup

Rradius

See rotorrange

See input setupSee spectrum setup

range, full scaleSee input setup

rated full load amps, 4-86rated full load RPM, 4-86rated no load amps, 4-86reenter

See options menureference frequency

See marker setupreference run, 4-31relative

See marker mode:cursor lockSee marker mode:fixed freqSee marker type

relative markersSee mkrs on/off

remote communications, E-1remote login

password, E-14username, E-13

repeatSee average mode

reportbalance job, 4-59 - 4-60database setup, 7-20dynamic points, 7-12end of shift, 7-9exceptions, 7-7missed points, 7-11notes, 7-21print test, 7-22

report header, 7-4reports, 7-1 - 7-22

balance job, 4-59 - 4-60dynamic points, 7-18

reset, 8-26reset measmt, 1-19

See function keysreview, 6-1 - 6-8review/enter

See change datarms, 7-17rotor

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 9User Manual change 01

Page 428: E-MANUAL

radius, 4-35two-plane, 4-35weight, 4-34

rotor bar condition assessmentreport, 4-89route, 1-1 - 1-40

instructions, 1-3starting a, 1-2

route collection, 8-20See route setup

route list, 1-4 - 1-6, 7-1, 7-5 - 7-6options, 1-5

route mode, 8-19See route setup

route mode:auto, 1-20route mode:normal, 1-19route setup, 8-18 - 8-22

See utilities menuroute spectrum, 8-20

See route setuproute spectrum:hide, 1-20, 1-23route spectrum:show, 1-13, 1-20,1-23RPM

See dynamic points reportSee input setup

run up/coast down, 4-94 - 4-116setup, 4-105take data, 4-97

run up/coast down setup, 4-105running speed, 1-24

data collection, 2-49 - 2-50See types of measurements

running speed measurements, 2-47 -2-48runout, 4-27runout magnitude, 4-30

See balance setuprunout phase

See balance setup

Ssave, I-19, 2-7

See function keyssave new data, 4-104screen 1

See display setupscreen 2

See display setupsensitivity

See input setupsensor, type of

input setup, 2-8serial number, I-11setpoints

alarm, 1-7settings

for fast data collection, 1-22settings menu, E-2settling mode, 8-16

conservative, 8-16off, 8-16

setup, 2-1 - 2-2, 5-1 - 5-2display, 2-5estimate trial weight, 4-44input, 2-5 - 2-11marker, 2-6, 2-29 - 2-31spectrum, 2-5, 2-12 - 2-13trial weight, 4-47 - 4-52trigger, 2-6, 2-26 - 2-28

showSee route spectrum

sidebandSee marker mode:cursor lockSee marker mode:fixed freqSee marker type

sideband frequencySee marker setup

sideband markerSee marker setup

sideband markers

Index - 10 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 429: E-MANUAL

See mkrs on/offsignals

low amplitude, 2-17, 4-82skip machine

See measurement optionsSee options menu

skip MPA setSee options menu

skip pointSee measurement optionsSee options menu

slow roll, 4-30specifications

CMVA55, B-1 - B-4spectral band, 7-17spectral band setup, 1-26spectral banding, 1-25spectral banding summary, 1-28spectral energy summary, 7-17spectrum setup, 2-5, 2-12 - 2-13

measurement type:freq, 2-14 - 2-19measurement type:orders, 2-20 -

2-21measurement type:track, 2-22 - 2-23

speed, 4-48CPM, 4-34Hz, 4-34ratio, 1-15reference point, 1-15tagging, 1-14

speed setup, 2-47splitting weights, 4-40standard microlog measurement

acceleration, App-5enveloped acceleration, App-5velocity, App-4

standard microlog measurmentdisplacement, App-5

standard microlog settingsacceleration measurement, App-16

- App-18

displacement measurement, App-25- App-26

enveloped accelerationmeasurement, App-20 - App-22

utilities menu, App-11velocity measurement, App-13

start freqSee measurement type:freqSee spectrum setup

status, 1-27, 6-7, 7-16See end of shift report

status line, I-11 - I-13stop bits, E-5subsync, 7-17subsynchronous, 7-17support module, I-3

CMVA6112, I-8supported modems, E-25sync, 7-17synchronous, 7-17synchronous RPM, 4-85synchronous time

See average typesystem

See system setupsystem setup, 8-10 - 8-17

See utilities menu

Ttach input, 2-49take data, 2-5, 2-43, 2-47temp/battery, 8-3 - 8-4

See utilities menutemperature

internal, 8-3the entire SD microlog

See uploadthis

See static measurementsthreshold, 7-7, 7-12, 7-17

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 11User Manual change 01

Page 430: E-MANUAL

See report controlstime

See set clocktime domain, 2-32to(CPM), 1-26, 6-5, 7-15trace

display setup, 2-5, 2-24tracking

See spectrum setuptracking filter, I-5, 4-65

setup, 4-67take data, 4-66

transducer sensitivitySee input setup

transfer, 3-1 - 3-8trial run, 4-32trial weight setup, 4-47 - 4-52triax sensor stud installation, G-6triaxial MPA setup, G-8triaxial sensor, G-1triaxial sensor interface, G-1trigger, 5-7trigger delay

See trigger setuptrigger level

See trigger setuptrigger mode

See trigger setuptrigger setup, 2-6, 2-26 - 2-28trigger slope

See trigger setuptrigger source

See trigger setuptrim run, 4-43 - 4-46troubleshooting

communications, E-26 - E-28two-plane balancing, 4-39, 4-46type

See dynamic points reportSee input setup

types of measurements, 2-3

UULS, I-1uniform

See windowunits

See exceptions reportSee input setup

units for weightsSee balance setup

upload, 3-7 - 3-8upload routes, E-17user mode, 2-1

analysis, 2-1, 5-1normal, 2-1, 5-1

user noteSee options menu

utilities, 8-1 - 8-26utilities menu, 8-10 - 8-22utility functions, 4-53

Vvalue

See exceptions reportvariation, amplitude

See average typeversion number, I-11vibration spectra, I-13view mpa spectrum, 8-23view setup

See options menu

Wwaiting mode, E-9warning

low battery, I-12signal overload, I-12

weight, 4-37

Index - 12 CMVA60 Micrologchange 01 User Manual

Page 431: E-MANUAL

rotor, 4-34weights

combining, 4-54 - 4-56splitting, 4-40

weights left in, 4-38window, 2-19, 4-84, 7-14

See dynamic points reportSee measurement type:freqSee measurement type:orders

window typeSee spectrum setup

working area, I-11

Xx axis label

See display setup

Zzoom, I-19, C-1 - C-2

automatic, 2-15zoom in

See function keyszoom out

See function keys

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 13User Manual change 01